2405 - Complete Instruction Manualbook 00

Wärtsilä Moss AS
Wärtsilä Moss AS Telephone E-mail: moss@wartsila.com

P.O. Box 1053 + 47 69 27 99 00
NO-1510 Moss Telefax Web:
NORWAY + 47 69 25 45 78 www.hamworthy.com
www.wartsila.com
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM

Moss Order no. should always be referred to when ordering Spare Parts, Guarantee- and service questions
TYPE: INERT GAS, GAS CARRIER

CAPACITY: 16000 Nm3/h
HULL NO: 2045
MOSS ORDER NO: 131381
SERIAL NO: 6703
BUILDING YEAR: 2014
Client / Client ref: Project no.: Serial no.:

Daewoo Shipbuilding & Marine Engineering P-6118 6703
Co., Ltd
Document title: Document no.:
INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR MOSS
131381 InstructionManual
INERT GAS SYSTEM FOR GAS CARRIER
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Ordre no: 131381 Chapter: 1-12
Rev: 00 Date:
CONTENT 20150507
Description:
1.00 GENERAL
2.00 TECHNICAL DATA
3.00 DESCRIPTION
4.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
5.00 INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPERATION AND STOP
6.00 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.00 SOME POSSIBLE CAUSES TO FAULTS DURING START AND

OPERATION
8.00 DRYER INSTRUCTION AND CHILLED WATER UNIT
9.00 PARTS / SPARE PARTS LIST - DRAWINGS
10.00 LIST OF DRAWINGS - ELECTRICAL
11.00 INSTRUCTION AND PAMPHLETS
12.00 CERTIFICATES
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Ordre no: 131381 Chapter: 1
Rev: 00 Date:
TABLE OF CONTENTS 20150507
Description: Page:
Chapter 1.00 GENERAL
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.2 Explosive Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
1.3 Inert Gas System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
1.4 Safe Oxygen Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
1.5 Health Hazards with Inert Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
1.5.1 Oxygen deficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

1.5.2 Toxicity of hydrocarbon vapours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
1.5.3 Inert gas toxicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
1.5.4 Tank Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
1.5.5 Electrostatic Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Order no: 131381 Chapter: 2
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 2.00 TECHNICAL DATA
2.1 Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.2 Water Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.3 El. power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.4 Instrument air at 6 - 10bar g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.5 Steam to drier heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3

Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 3.00 DESCRIPTION
3.1 The Oil Burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.2 The Ignition Burner (Fig. 3-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.3 The cooling Tower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.4 Fuel Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.5 The Combustion Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.6 The Refrigeration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.7 The Dryer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.8 The Inert Gas System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
3.9 The Cooling Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
3.10 The Drain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5

Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 4.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
4.1 Indicating Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1.1 Temperature Indicators (TI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

4.1.2 Pressure Indicators (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1.3 Flow Indicator (FI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.4 Analyse Indicators (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.5 Moist Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.6 Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.2 Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.1 Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

4.2.2 Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.3 Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.4 Current Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.5 The Ignition Transformer (item No. 209) . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.6 The Flame Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.3 Instrumentation and Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.3.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.3.2 Main Control Panel, located near by the I.G.G. . . . . . 4 - 4
4.4 Qxygen Analysing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.4.1 Oxygen analysing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

4.4.2 The Instrument Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.4.3 Function description: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 5.00 INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPERATION AND STOP
5.1 Short Form, Step by Step, Plant Start and Stop Instruction . . 5 - 1
5.1.1 Before Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

5.1.2 Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
5.1.3 Stopping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.2 Descriptive Instructions for Plant Start and Operation . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.2.2 Normal (auto) start (Local or remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.2.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
5.3 Air Venting (local or remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
5.3.1 Before Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

5.3.2 Start/Stop procedure for venting the tanks
with Air Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 6.00 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 I.M.O. Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.3 Burner Scrubber Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.4 Refrigeration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.5 Dryer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.6 Adjustment and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.6.1 Oil Burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.6.2 Adjustable O2-alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.6.3 The Combustion Air System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.6.4 The Fuel Oil System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.6.5 The Gas System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.6.6 The Seawater System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.7.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.7.2 Items to be checked at regular intervals. . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.7.3 Other items to be checked regularly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
6.7.4 Set points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
6.8 Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
6.9 Lubrication Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11

Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
Description: Page:
Chapter 7.00 SOME POSSIBLE CAUSES TO FAULTS DURING START AND

OPERATION
7.1 If control current is not on:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.2 If ignition does not take place:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.3 If fuel oil pressure is too low: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.4 If seawater pressure is too low:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.5 If seawater level in cooling tower is too high: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.6 If inert gas temperature is higher than approx. 5°C

above seawater inlet temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
7.7 If the O2 content increases, and the fuel oil consumption

is below normal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
7.8 If the instrument air pressure is too low: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
Rev: 00 Date:
1. GENERAL 20150507
1.1 General
With regard to explosion hazard following are to be noticed:
Inert gas is used to displace air in order to minimize explosion hazards.
Inert gas is also used during gas freeing tanks and pipes, when the cargo
vapour is displaced by inert prior to ventilation with air, and similarly when
changing cargoes. The inert gas produced on board gas ships should NOT be
used in connection with ammonia, due to the concentration of carbon dioxides
in the inert gas. Ammonia will react with CO2, and form ammonium salts, e.g.
ammonium carbonate and ammonium carbamate. These salts may block
pipes and valves and may damage the compressors.
With ammonia, gas freeing should be performed with air, and loading should
start with air filled tanks. Compared with hydrocarbons, the ignition
temperature and energy of ammonia is far greater, and consequently the
explosion risk is minimal.
The danger always exists, due to the fact that all three elements needed to start
a fire or explosion will be present.
These three elements are:
1. A combustible element, fuel, represented by hydrocarbon vapours from

the cargo.
2. Energy to start the combustion, represented by sparks from various
sources.
3. Oxygen to support the combustion, represented by the oxygen in the air,
which contains roughly 21% oxygen and 79% Nitrogen.
To set off a fire or explosion, all three elements must be present
simultaneously.
If any of the three elements can be eliminated, the danger of explosion is also
eliminated, and this is the philosophy behind inert gas as a safety factor.
When looking for the simplest element to remove one will find that:
1. The fuel part can never be eliminated, due to the nature of the cargo,
which in itself is highly flammable.
The cargo will always evaporate explosive hydrocarbon vapours, which
will fill any void spaces in the tanks, and mix with the air entering the tanks
through open hatches, etc.
1-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
2. The energy spark to set off an explosion is also very difficult to eliminate
completely.
Exhaustive studies have been made by maritime bodies worldwide. No
exact conclusion has been drawn, but it is a recognized fact that the most
dangerous source of ignition is that of static electricity, which may be
created in various ways inside the tank.
The nature of this static electricity is such that it is difficult to recognize,

and therefore almost impossible to eliminate.
3. The only element left is the oxygen to support combustion. This is always
present as 21 % of the earth's atmosphere. However, the percentage of
oxygen inside the cargo tank can be controlled by replacing the air with
an inert gas, namely a gas with an oxygen content too low to form an
explosive mixture regardless of the amount of hydrocarbon gases in the
atmosphere of the tank.
1.2 Explosive Limits
The chemical composition of air is basically:
Oxygen O2 = 21% volume
Nitrogen N2 = 79% volume
A mixture of hydrocarbon gas and air has two limits of explosivity.
• the lower explosive limit (LEL), is 2% of gas - (98% of air)

• the upper explosive limit (UEL), is 10% of gas - (90% of air)
These limits are specific for each individual hydro-carbon gas.
Within these two limits, the mixture is flammable.

Below the lower explosive limit, the mixture is too lean to burn.
Above the upper explosive limit, the mixture is too rich to burn.
• Hydrocarbon gas in a hazardous mixture containing oxygen will only burn if

the content of hydrocarbon gas in the mixture lies between the upper and
lower limits of flammability. These limits, which are respectively 10% and
2% in air, vary according to the oxygen content of the mixture. The gap
between them narrows progressively as the oxygen content diminishes.
(See diagram M4815-001std).
• If the oxygen content of the gaseous mixture is BELOW 11%, the
hydrocarbon gas contained in the mixture CANNOT BURN WHATEVER
ITS CONCENTRATION MAY BE. An atmosphere containing less than
11% of oxygen is considered to be THEORETICALLY INERT.
1-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
1-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
1.3 Inert Gas System

Inert gas is a common name on gases, which cannot form explosive mixtures
with either hydrocarbons or ammonia. This is due to lack of oxygen or carbon
monoxide in the gas.
The inert gas is produced by removing the oxygen in the air by a combustion
process. This process takes place in a Moss Inert Gas Generator, where diesel
oil is used as fuel. If the combustion process is properly adjusted to
stoichiometric conditions, the gas produced will contain very little oxygen,
usually in the region of 1-2 % by volume, but can burn down to 0,5% by volume.
The inert gas composition will usually be approx. 85 % nitrogen and 15 %

carbon dioxide, with traces of carbon monoxide and nitric oxide.
1.4 Safe Oxygen Levels

During inert gas plant operations, it is of utmost importance to keep the oxygen
level as low as possible, in order to have the greatest possible safety margin.
Oxygen levels:
11% OXYGEN: MINIMUM OXYGEN LEVEL

necessary to support combustion/explosion. This level,
however, is not considered safe, since there is no margin
left for measurement errors.
8% OXYGEN: MAXIMUM OXYGEN LEVEL ALLOWED

during inert gas plant operations. However, all necessary
steps must be taken to ensure oxygen level below 8%.
5% OXYGEN: SATISFACTORY OXYGEN LEVEL

This is considered the normal maximum level that a good
operating vessel shall maintain, even with the worst boiler
load condition.
Less than 3%
Oxygen: BEST OXYGEN LEVEL
for a good operating vessel. The I.G.S. operations in the
following sections refer to this level.
1.5 Health Hazards with Inert Gas

NOTE! ALL PERSONNEL MUST BE MADE AWARE OF THE HAZARDS
AND PRECAUTIONS LISTED IN THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS.
1-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
1.5.1 Oxygen deficiency

The inerted areas are areas with an atmosphere containing very little oxygen.
Exposure to an atmosphere containing less than 5 % oxygen results in

IMMEDIATE UNCONSCIOUSNESS. If resuscitation is delayed for more than
approximately four minutes, irreversible brain damage will occur.
FURTHER DELAY WILL KILL.
Even if the oxygen deficiency is not sufficient to cause unconsciousness, the

mind is liable to become apathetic and complacent, and even if these
symptoms are noticed and escape is attempted, physical exertion will
aggravate the weakness of both mind and body. Therefore, an oxygen
deficiency is much more serious than exposure to hydrocarbon vapours.
For this reason a full scale reading on a portable oxygen analyser (21 %)
should be obtained throughout the tank before entry is allowed. Additionally
precautions are necessary before and during tank entry, to ensure that inert
gas does not enter a gas free tank via I.G. main cargo pipelines or possible
bulkhead cracks.
NOTE!
AN OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERE MAY NOT ONLY BE PRESENT
WITHIN A CARGO TANK, BUT ALSO IN ADJACENT CARGO PUMP
ROOMS, PERMANENT BALLAST TANKS, VOID SPACES, AT GAS EXITS
AND WITHIN INERT GAS PLANTS TO BE OVERHAULED.
1.5.2 Toxicity of hydrocarbon vapours

Inert gas has no effect on the toxic nature of hydrocarbon gases, and the
problem is not different from the toxicity of hydrocarbon vapours in ships
without an I.G. system. Because of possible gas pockets, regeneration, etc.,
gas freeing must continue until the entire compartment shows a zero reading
with a reliable combustible gas indicator, or a 1 % lower flammable limit
reading, should the instrument have a sensitivity scale on which a zero reading
is impractical.
1.5.3 Inert gas toxicity

Only combustion of oil may produce limited amounts of toxic gases such as
sulphur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx).
Measurement is the only way to detect the presence of these toxic gases.
However, if the hydrocarbon gas content of an inerted tank exceeds
approximately 2 % by volume before beginning of gas freeing, dilution of toxic
components of inert gas as gas freeing progresses can be correlated with the
readings of an approved combustible gas indicator. If ventilation of the
compartment results in a lower flammable limit reading of 1 % or less, in
conjunction with an oxygen reading of 21 % by volume, toxic trace gases will
1-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
have been diluted to a concentration which will be safe to enter. Alternatively,

and disregarding the initial hydrocarbon gas content, continue ventilating until
a steady oxygen reading of 21 % by volume is reached.
1.5.4 Tank Pressure

Personnel should be advised of the practical hazards when an inerted cargo
tank is maintained at a positive pressure. The pressure must be sufficiently
relieved before opening any tank lids.
1.5.5 Electrostatic Hazards

An electrostatic charge can occur in the small particulate matter carried in flue
gas. However, the charge is normally of a low level.
Cargo tanks are usually in an inerted or gas filled condition and electrostatic
ignition is not a consideration unless the oxygen content of the tank
atmosphere is increased by the entrance of air, or unless it is necessary to inert
a tank already containing a flammable atmosphere.
1.5.6 Repair of Inert Gas Generating Plant

Inert gas is asphyxiating and extreme caution must be exercised at all times
when working on the plant. Being in fresh air during the work is not a safety
guarantee, since inert gas possibly leaking from the plant can still cause
unconsciousness very quickly. Therefore, the plant should be completely gas
freed before any equipment is opened up.
An internal examination of any unit, such as the inert gas scrubber, must not
be performed without following the standard recommendations for entering
closed spaces. Blind flanges should be fitted where applicable or the plant
should be completely isolated.
1-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 2 - TECHNICAL DATA
Rev: 00 Date:
2. TECHNICAL DATA 20150507
2.1 Oil Consumption

Gas/air
Capacity of plant: Inert Gas/Dry Air
16000 Nm³/h
Gas pressure at drier

outlet: Approx. 0,25 bar
Gas temperature at
generator outlet: Max. 5°C above seawater temperature inlet
Normal oxygen content: 1,0 - 2,0% by volume
Typical gas composition (may vary according to O2 content)

O2 = 1 - 2 vol %
CO2 = Approx. 14 %
CO = Max. 100 ppm
NOx = Max. 100 ppm
SOx = Normal 1 ppm
N2 + Ar = Balance
Soot = Bacharach 0
Provided combustion of marine distillate fuel category DMA, ISO 8217:1996.
The Generator and the system around it is designed to burn Marine Fuel and
is capable of delivering O2 content down to 0,5%.
Oil
Type: Marine destillate fuels category ISO,
DMA or DMB, ISO 8217: 2010(E)
Consumption: Approx. 1394 kg/h
2-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 2 - TECHNICAL DATA
2.2 Water Consumption

Seawater (raw)
Cooling tower: Approx. 1104 m³/h
Pressure: 2 bar g at plant inlet
Temperature: Max. temp. 32°C
Temp. increase
through plant: Approx. 13 °C
Fresh water circulation system

Condenser for refrigeration unit:Approx. 125 m3/h
Cooler for dryer: Approx. 23 m3/h
Fresh water
Air inlet burner chamber: Approx. 0.6 m3/h
Blowers: Approx. 0.4 m3/h each
Freshwater cleaning: Approx. 14.3 m3/h
Pressure approx. 6 bar at plant inlet
2.3 El. power consumption

El. power 3 phase, 440 V, 60 Hz
Rating Net
El. motor, 1st. stag (3600 RPM) 125 kW 96 kW

El. motor, 2st. stag (3600 RPM) 125 kW 100 kW
El. motor, f.o. pump (3600 RPM) 6.4 kW 4.5 kW
El. motor, cooling unit. (1800 RPM) 290 kW
El. motor, drier fan (3600 RPM) 63 kW 45.1kW
Heater, drier (if selected) 340 kW
Control system 220V, 60Hz: Approx. 3.5 kW
2.4 Instrument air at 6 - 10bar g

Control system (in balance): Approx. 4 Nm³/h
Ignition burner: Approx. 0.4 Nm³/h
2.5 Steam to drier heater

Normal temp.: approx 180°C
Normal press.: 10 bar (g)
Consumption Approx. 590 kg/h,
2-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 3 - DESCRIPTION
Rev: 00 Date:
3. DESCRIPTION 20150507
3.1 The Oil Burner

is of the mechanical high pressure atomising type.
This I.G.G. is built for burning Light Marine Diesel/gas oil. The oil is directed to
the orifice through some tangentially slots, thus the oil gets a rotating motion
and the oil to the burner leaves the nozzles as a thin rotating membrane which
is atomised just after the nozzle. The atomised oil from a cone, in which the top
angle depends on the nozzle type and oil pressure. When oil pressure and
thereby oil quantity is increased, the rotating velocity increases, and the
atomising cone increases. (Higher oil pressure = higher oil quantity = higher
rotating velocity - greater atomising cone).
The oil gun is adjustable in axial direction to find the best position for the oil
nozzle. A stuffing box around the oil gun with fibre-glass gasket avoids gas
leakage. The combustion air is supplied tangentially to the burner, already
when entering the outer gas chamber, is brought in rotation.
The rotation is strengthened at the same time as the velocity increases through
a number of vanes on the way via an exactly circular distribution opening
(burner throat) into the combustion chamber, where combustion air and fuel oil
are mixed.
A small part of air passes through a tube around the oil gun as "primary air".
The "primary air" blowing along the oil gun prevents settling of uncombustioned
oil particles on the fuel oil nozzle. For complete combustion it is necessary to
mix the atomised fuel oil and combustion air as good as possible. This in
obtained by high relative velocity between oil and gas. The axial air velocity at
the oil nozzle must, however, not be higher than the rate of combustion, as this
would mean that the flame would be blown away from the nozzle.
Therefore, as mentioned before, a high rotating velocity is obtained even at a

low axial velocity at the centre of the burner.
For further increase of the relative velocity between oil and air, they are given
oppositely directed rotation.
The combustion chamber is divided into an upper and a lower part. Each of
these parts, the upper, which is cylindrical, and the lower, which has the shape
of a cut cone, are made as water jackets to avoid too high thermal stresses.
In the front of the burner, there are openings for oil gun, ignition burner and
openings with glasses and gate valves for flame control and inspection.
3-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
3.2 The Ignition Burner (Fig. 3-3)

which is welded into an opening in front plate of the oil burner, consists mainly
of a cylindrical combustion chamber with internal linings, 1.0 US. gal/h fuel oil
nozzle (item no. 88) and an ignition glow plug (item no. 89). Combustion air,
which flows outside the internal lining for cooling, is supplied from the 100 psi
working air system, and in this line a solenoid valve (item no. 152) is mounted.
The top plate into which the oil nozzle and glow plug are fitted, is removed by
opening a cap nut. In the oil supply line one solenoid operated shut-off valve
(item no. 158) is mounted.
The 10-15 cm long pilot flame comes out through the tube, which connects the
ignition burner to the front plate of the main burner.
Time from when the ignition glow plug is activated and the main burner is
supplied with fuel oil is approximately 35 seconds.
3.3 The cooling Tower

A precooling of the gas is obtained by injecting seawater into the central tube
which is leading the combustion gases from the oil burner down to the lower
part of the cooling tower where a wet filter made of stainless steel mesh
demister pads are mounted. The purpose of the wet filter is to obtain a good
contact between the combustion gases and the cooling water.
The cooling tower is the place where the inert gas is cleaned and cooled.
Cooling and cleaning occur when the gas is flowing upwards in counter stream
with the water from a number of full cone nozzles (item No. 127) installed in the
lower part of the tower.
After having been effectively cooled and cleaned, the gas finally passes
through a stainless steel demister before it leaves the outlet duct on the upper
part of the tower. The demister is abundantly dimensioned to effectively
prevent any water droplets to be carried away from the tower.
In the tower shell at the same height as the water nozzles man holes with
removable sight glasses for inspection and possible cleaning and change of
nozzles are mounted.
3.4 Fuel Oil Systems

consists of:
Oil pump with electric motor, (item Nos. 82, 83), Duplex oil filter with three way
valve, (item No. 81), and oil piping. Connections to oil gun is made by flexible
hose, (item No. 84). The oil supply pipeline for the main burner and oil return
pipeline is fitted with one remotely operated ball valve each (item Nos. 153 and
156). A pressure regulating valve is fitted on the oil pump unit (item No. 80).
3-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
To protect the environment, a solenoid valve and a non-return valve (item Nos.
157 and 66) are fitted for air flush of oil main pipeline when the plant is shut
down.
3.5 The Combustion Air System

consists of the following parts:
Blower with electric motors, tube connection and valves for regulating of air
quantity. The blower is of two stage centrifugal fan type and driven by two
electric motors direct mounted on fan. Freshwater injection between the fan
stages for cooling of stage 2 fan.
The characteristic is: Increasing motor load when the pressure at the
discharging side increases.
Centrifugal fans and electric motors are mounted on a common base frame
with resilient mountings.
To avoid vibrations in the pipes, flexible connection is mounted on blowers

outlets.
NB! MAKE SURE ALWAYS TO HAVE FRESH WATER SUPPLY TO

BLOWERS WHILE RUNNING.
3.6 The Refrigeration Unit

The refrigeration unit id built for cooling the inert gas from max. 37 °C 100%
RH to below 5 °C. 100% RH. The purpose of the cooling process is to remove
water from the inert gas by condensate that will be separated and drained
overboard.
The cooling is done in a two step process containing chiller unit with screw
compressor, condenser and evaporator that cools down a glycol/water 20/80
mixture which is circulated in a circulation system. The circulation system is
consisting of a circulation pump, strainer, glycol/water storage tank and filling
equipment..
The chilled glycol/water mixture is then used in the inert gas cooler to cool
down the inert gas to below 5 °C. To avoid water carry over a demister is
installed at refrigeration unit outlet.
3.7 The Dryer Unit

The dryer unit is built to dry the inert gas to a required dewpoint of typically -
45 °C. This is done by a continuous operation. The dryer consists of two
adsorption towers filled with desiccant. One tower is drying while the other
tower is regenerating.
3-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
After a cycle time of 8 hours there is a changeover and the regenerated tower
will start drying while the wet tower will be regenerated. The regeneration is
done by heating of the desiccant, which removes the water.
After the heating is finished the desiccant must be cooled to prepare it to start
adsorbing water in next cycle. Cooling is done in two stages. First air is
circulated and passes through a heat exchanger with water as cooling media,
which is then lead through the desiccant. Then a small amount of inert gas of
approx 5 °C is used to do the final cooling and also remove the air with high
oxygen content preparing the dryer for the changeover.
Now the regeneration is finished and the adsorption tower goes in stand by.
Before the changeover the dryer run in parallel mode with both towers drying
before the changeover and the regeneration process will be repeated on the
wet tower.
3.8 The Inert Gas System

includes a pneumatically operated regulating valve, four pneumatically
operated on/off valves, oxygen analyser, gas refrigeration unit and an inert gas
heat-regenerated drier. The valve (item No. 10) is keeping a constant pressure
in the combustion chamber. A constant pressure is necessary in order to keep
steady oxygen content.
By means of the two valves (item Nos. 1 and 2), the gas is led to deck main line
or to atmosphere depending on the gas analysis. The valves are normally
operated by the oxygen and dew point analysers and the gas is led to drier line
only when the gas analysis meets with the requirements.
Under all other conditions the gas is blown off to atmosphere. The O2-content
can be decreased/increased on the touch screen on main control panel which
function is to increase/decrease the amount of air to the burner/scrubber.
The inert gas can be by-passed the refrigeration unit by manual shut-off valve
(item no. 12) and the gas dryer with the shut-off valve (item No. 17). The valves
are equipped with limit switches, which makes starting of the inert gas dryer
impossible when valve positions are not correct.
3.9 The Cooling Water System

For cooling and cleaning of the inert gas, seawater is used. The main part in
the cooling tower and rest is used for cooling of the burner and pre-cooling of
the gas in the central tube.
Seawater is led to scrubber when main seawater valve (item No. 5) opens.
Seawater is now led to lower part of the scrubber. The gas velocity is in counter
stream of the seawater shower from the nozzles, which are fitted in the
circumference inside the scrubber. The seawater quantity for cleaning is the
3-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
major part. A less part is led to the cooling of the combustion chamber (central
tube).
This water will cool down the central tube and pre-cool the inert gas. The
pre-cooling is obtained by injection of seawater in the gas stream in the lower
part of the central tube. The seawater flow will always be sufficient as long as
the recommended design pressure at plant inlet (2,0 bar) is correct.
One manual control valve (Item 50) is mounted in the seawater line to cooling
jacket. During commissioning, our Service Engineer will, when running the SW
pump only, adjust the pressure to approx. 0,6 bar and lock the valve in correct
position. Please note that the pressure seen on Pressure gauge Item 162 will
be higher when the combustion air blowers are running at normal operation
pressure.
Check that all air is evacuated from the cooling jacket outlet tube leading from
the top (from LS 191) and ending inside the sight glass.
It means to have a solid flow of water inside.
NOTE! THE VALVE (ITEM 50) IS SET BY COMMISSIONING ENGINEER

DURING COMMISSIONING AND SHOULD BE OPERATED BY QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL ONLY.
3.10 The Drain System

The seawater effluent from the scrubber is controlled by a regulating valve
(item 14).
This is a differential pressure control system for transmitters PT 212 and PT

214. Valve item 14 is open at start up and will, during running, set a water
column level in the effluent line, by measuring pressure in the effluent line and
the inert gas scrubber outlet.
Overboard valve (item 16) shall be open, and if closed, the inert gas plant will
not be able to start because of the signal from the limit switch.
The drain to the bilge system is to be operated automatically or manually by

touch keys in front of Main Control Panel.
During flame failure, the bilge valve (item 15) will open, and valve (item 14) will
close until effluent pipe is empty.
3-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
3-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 4 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
Rev: 00 Date:
4. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 20150507
4.1 Indicating Instruments
Item Nos. refers to "P & I Diagram I", "P & I Diagram II" and “P & I Diagram III”.
4.1.1 Temperature Indicators (TI)

• Temperature seawater main inlet scrubber (item No. 175).
• Temperature seawater outlet cooling jacket (item No. 178).
• Temperature inert gas outlet scrubber (item No. 179).
• Temperature I.G. outlet drier/delivery line (item No. 219).
• Glycol/water temp inert gas cooler outlet (item No. 476).
• Inert gas outlet refrigeration unit (item No. 478/498).
• Glycol/water temp inert gas cooler inlet (item No. 479).
• Steam temp heater inlet dryer (item No. 572).
• Regeneration air cooler inlet on dryer (item No. 574).
• Regeneration air cooler outlet on dryer (item No. 576).
• I.G./regeneration air inlet adsorption vessels (item No. 571).
• Regeneration air purging temp (item No. 582).
• Inert gas temperature scrubber outlet (item No. 188).
4.1.2 Pressure Indicators (PI)
• Fresh water to burner (item No. 159).
• Instrument air inlet pressure (item No. 160).
• Combustion air pressure burner inlet (item No. 161).
• Seawater pressure cooling jacket (item No. 162).
• Blowers outlet (item No. 163).
• Seawater pressure to water nozzles (item No. 164).
• Oil pressure after fuel oil pump (item No. 165).
• Fuel oil nozzle return pressure (item No. 166).
• Fresh water flushing blowers (item No. 167).
• Inert gas pressure outlet drier (item No. 168/219).
• Inert gas delivery pressure (item No. 182).
• N2-pressure (item No. 206).
• Inert gas pressure outlet cooling tower (item No. 214).
• Inert gas outlet refrigeration unit (item No. 464).
4-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
• Outlet glycol/water circulation pump (item No. 462).

• Inlet glycol/water circulation pump (item No. 465).
• Inlet dryer adsorption vessels (item No. 561).
4.1.3 Flow Indicator (FI)
• Inert Gas capacity (item No. 280).
4.1.4 Analyse Indicators (AI)
• O2-content inert gas (item No. 204).
4.1.5 Moist Indicators
• Dew point dryer outlet (item No. 583).
4.1.6 Transmitters
• Pressure transmitter - I.G. deck main (item No. PT-182).
• Temperature transmitter - seawater outlet cooling jacket (item No.
TT-178).
• Pressure transmitter - I.G. outlet scrubber (item No. TT-188).
• Pressure transmitter - sea water effluent (item No. PT-212).
• Pressure transmitter - I.G. outlet scrubber (item No. PT-214).
• Pressure transmitter - I.G. dryer outlet (item No. PT-213).
• Temperature transmitter - I.G. dryer outlet (item No. TT-219).
• Flow transmitter - I.G. capacity (item No. FT-280).
• Temperature transmitter - I.G. temperature cooler outlet (item No. 498).
• Temperature transmitter - temperature inlet adsorption towers (item No.
571).
• Temperature transmitter - regeneration air purging outlet (Item No. 582).
• Dew point transmitter - dryer outlet (item No. 583).
4-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
4.2 Safety Interlocks

4.2.1 Temperature Switches
Inert gas temperature high +5c, cooling tower outlet, alarm and stop of plant
(item No. 498).
High I.G. temp. outlet drier plant, alarm and atmosphere valve will open (item
No. 219).
High S.W. temperature outlet cooling jacket, alarm and stop of plant (item No.
178).
End of heating, starting cooling in regeneration process (item No. 582).
4.2.2 Pressure Switches
Low instrument air pressure, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 183).
Low seawater pressure to cooling tower, alarm and stop of plant (item No.
184).
Low fuel oil pressure to burner, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 185).
High pressure to deck, alarm and atmosphere valve will open (item No. 182).
4.2.3 Level Switches
Low level in cooling jacket, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 191).
High seawater level in cooling tower, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 193).
4.2.4 Current Switches

• Lower load blower 1, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 181-1).
• Lower load blower 2, alarm and stop of plant (item No. 181-2).
4.2.5 The Ignition Transformer (item No. 209)
• A glow plug transformer, which is connected to 2204 and gives approx 13 V
to the glow plug fitted on the ignition burner.
4-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
4.2.6 The Flame Control
Has the mission to register the burner flame, and on the contrary case take
care of stopping the plant and that alarm is given. The flame control consists
mainly of a scanner unit with photo electric cell and an amplifier which amplifies
the weak signals from the photo cell to impulses that are able to operate a
flame relay. See separate instruction for adjustment of the amplifier, Section
12.
4.3 Instrumentation and Control Panels

4.3.1 General
In the following are listed all instruments and control panel within the system,
with the main items and the function of same. The operation and use of the
panels during plant operation are covered in detail in following section 5.
4.3.2 Main Control Panel, located near by the I.G.G.
The panel contains the programmable controller, which takes care of start/
stop/alarm/trip functions and running mode. On the front of the panel, the I.G.
plant is visualized in form of a touch screen with the following principle:
The control system is provided with N.C. alarm contacts, i.e. upon loss of
electric power, the system will fail to safe. At normal running conditions the
alarm-banner is dark and no flashing bell can be seen. Any alarm condition is
indicated on the touch screen (on any page) by a flashing bell in the upper right
hand corner of the screen and an audible alarm will be given by a horn.
The last occurred alarm is described in the alarm-banner, with a red text. By
acknowledging the alarm, the audible alarm will stop. Acknowledging the
alarm, on the touch screen, is done, by pressing the alarm banner. The text
then turns from red to blue. After having reset the alarm, and in case the alarm
cause is removed, the alarm description will disappear.
In case of more than one alarm having been activated, only the last registered
alarm will be shown in the alarm-banner. In order to accept the other alarms,
push the "Alarm list" button, and accept each alarm description separately.
By too high/low oxygen content, as well as most other alarm and shut down
situations, the inert gas to atmosphere valve will open and the inert gas main
valve will close.
4.4 Qxygen Analysing System

• The oxygen analyser is located in a separate panel, which is located in
near vicinity of the generator.
• For calibration, see manufacturer's instructions.
4-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
4.4.1 Oxygen analysing
Variations in oxygen content are registered directly by the O2-analyser (item

No. 728). The bubbler glass (item No. 331) cleanes the gas and indicates flow.
Analyser sample flow is set by the flow control valve (item No. 745).
The threeway valve (item No. 358) selects between sample (instrument) air or
N2. Sample gas is taken from generator outlet nozzle pressurized to the
analyser panel.
For calibration, see instruction for O2-analyser.
4.4.2 The Instrument Air
Supply to the pneumatically operated valves and control devices shall have a
pressure of 6 - 10 bar (g), and have to be dry and clean.
The pressure is reduced by the reduction valve (item No. 262) to max. 7 bar (g).
4.4.3 Function description:
At starting of Inert gas system in Auto mode, the refrigeration unit start and
seawater inlet valve (item No. 5) open. Approx. 10 seconds later the seawater
pump will start. Low seawater pressure alarm is set to 1 bar but is delayed for
20 seconds after start of pump.
20 seconds after start of the seawater pump the capacity setting valves (item
Nos. 7-1 and 7-2) and pressure regulating valve (item No. 10) will close and
the 2 stage centrifugal fans will start against closed valves. After a delay of 30
seconds the valves (item Nos. 7-1, 7-2 and 10) will go to set positions and start
regulating.
180 seconds after start the fuel oil pump is started and will start to run in
circulation mode. After running in 30 seconds the glow plug (item No. 89) will
be energised for approx. 60 seconds before fuel oil supply valve to ignition
burner (item No. 158) open and a spray of oil will ignite on the glow plug and
make a pilot flame. Then the fuel oil supply to main burner valve (item No. 156)
will open and fuel oil circulation valve (item No. 153) will close. The pilot flame
will then ignite fuel oil in the main burner and the fuel oil supply valve to ignition
burner (item No. 158) will be closed. If there is no flame detected by flame
sensor (item No. 200) there will be a burner flame alarm, which will stop the
system.
The required inert gas oxygen level is set on the main panel (HIC 204) and will
be controlled by fuel oil return control valve (item No. 23).
4-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
The inert gas shall now pass through the refrigeration unit. The refrigeration
unit bypass valve (item No. 12-1) shall be closed and refrigeration unit valves
inlet and outlet (item Nos. 12-2 and 12-3) shall be open.
The inert gas enter the refrigeration unit with a temperature of approx 5°C
higher than the seawater temperature and will leave at temperature below 5°C.
The glycol/water mixture that enter the heat exchanger is cooled down to
-0,5°C by a chiller unit (item No. 401) and circulated in a closed circulation
system.
The start of dryer is delayed 360 seconds after start and will only start as long
as the inert gas temperature on outlet of refrigeration unit is below 5°C. One
tower will then start drying while the other tower start regeneration. The cycle
time before changeover is 8 hours. Regeneration is done by heating for max.
5,5 hours. During the heating the temp at tower inlet shall be approx. 180°C
and this can be regulated by throttling regeneration fan inlet valve (item No.
512). The heating will end when regeneration air outlet temp reach 120°C (item
No. TT-582) and then cooling for 1 hour followed by 75 min of purging. If the
heating did not use it entirely 5,5 hours the regeneration will go into standby.
15 minutes before changeover the dryer will run in parallel mode where both
dryer vessels are drying. After parallel there is a changeover.
The pressure-regulating valve (item No. 10) is working against a set point set
in main control panel (PID 10). The pressure is measured by a pressure
transmitter (item No. 213). At start up of the plant the inert gas main valve (item
No. 1) is closed and purge to atmosphere valve (item No. 2) is open and the
inert gas is purged to atmosphere.
To get inert gas to the tanks you push select consumer button on touch screen
in main control panel and inert gas main valve (item No. 1) will open and when
this has opened purge to atmosphere valve close.
If the oxygen or dew point levels are not stabilised or acceptable the push
button will start blinking and the inert gas to consumer will initiate as soon as
the conditions are acceptable. If you get oxygen content or high dew point
alarm the inert gas to consumer process will stop and start again as soon as
the acceptable condition is reached.
4-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 5 - INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPER. AND STOP
Rev: 00 Date:
5. INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPERATION AND STOP 20150507
5.1 Short Form, Step by Step, Plant Start and Stop Instruction
Plant Start and Stop Instructions
By activation of key "HELP" on the touch-screen a page containing keys for

operation procedures and troubleshooting will show up.
5.1.1 Before Start

1. IG Generator system shall be powered at all times.
2. Check that there is no active alarm.
3. Reset all alarms, if any, by pressing the keys "ALARM ACCEPT" and
"ALARM RESET".
NOTE!
Selection is also available through the serial link with IAS, if remote
control is selected.
4. Check the oxygen analyser for correct calibration.

5. Select blower by operation of keys "SELECT BLOWER 101-1 /102-1"
and/or "SELECT BLOWER 101-2, 102-2".
NOTE!
6. Press h/s 111 "AUTO START" of cooling plant and h/s 114 "AUTO
START" of drier if dry inert gas/air shall be supplied to deck.
5.1.2 Starting Procedure
Auto Mode (local or remote)
1. Carry out checks listed in Section 5.10 "Before start".
2. Select local or remote start by pressing "SELECT REMOTE CONTROL"
(h/s 313) locally on main control panel or remotely from IAS.
3. Press key "START" for activating the page for automatic start of Inert
Gas.
4. Press key "START I.G.G. AUTO" (h/s 311).
5. Check that it is a flow through the bubbler unit for cleaning of sample gas
(item No. 210).
6. Check that all air is evacuated from cooling jacket outlet in sight glass.
5-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
7. The start sequence is indicated with lamps on the touch screen. Wait until
the light "FLAME ON" (h200) is energized and plant is running with full
capacity and with acceptable oxygen content.
8. Check the fuel oil return pressure, temperatures and pressures.
9. If necessary, adjust O2-content on touch screen with man. loading station
(item No. 216).
10. Until the O2-content is inside the preset limits, the gas will be led to
atmosphere through the purge line. At acceptable O2-content and dew
point the inert gas main valve will open after activation of key h/s 308
"SELECT CONSUMER".
NOTE!
Manual Mode
1. Carry out checks listed in section 5.10 "Before start".
2. Press key "START IGG MANUAL" for activating the page for manual
start of Inert Gas Generator.
3. Press key "MANUAL START/STOP" (h/s 312).
4. Start Seawater system with key "START/STOP S.W. PUMP" (h/s 128).
Seawater supply and effluent valves will open immediately. Seawater
pump will start approx. 5 secs. after opening the valves. The cooling plant
will start.
5. Wait 20 sec. to give the seawater valve time to open and then check that
all air is evacuated from cooling jacket at pipe outlet in sight glass.
6. Start combustion air blower(s) with key "START/ STOP BLOWER" (h/s
107). Blower 101-1, 102-1 start is delayed after start of blower 101-2,
102-2, when both are selected.
7. Check that it is a flow through the O2-bubbler unit for cleaning of sample
gas (item No. 210).
8. Check that all air is evacuated from cooling jacket outlet in sight glass.
9. Wait approximately 50 sec. for the blower to purge the system and start
fuel oil pump with key "START/STOP F. O. PUMP" (h/s 82).
10. Energize the ignition glow plug with key
"START/STOP GLOW PLUG" (h/s 209).
11. Wait another 55 seconds, and admit air and fuel oil to the ignitor with key
"START/STOP IGN. BURNER" (h/s 152).
5-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
12. Wait another 3 seconds and admit fuel oil to the main burner with key
"START/STOP MAIN BURNER" (h/s 156).
13. Switch off " START/STOP GLOW PLUG" by pressing key h/s 209.
14. When the main flame is established and indicated with "FLAME ON",
(h200) allow 4 seconds flame stabilizing time and press key
"START/STOP IGN. BURNER" (h/s 152) to switch off ignition burner.
15. Check the fuel oil return pressure, temperatures and pressures.
16. Until the O2-content is inside the pre-set limits, the gas will be led by-pass
the drier.
6 min after start of main burner the drier will start (if TT498 temperture out
of cooler is below 5c) and the by-pass valve will close.
At acceptable O2-content, temperature outlet cooling plant and dew point

outlet drier, the inert gas main valve will open when key h/s 308 "SELECT
CONSUMER" is activated. The atmosphere valve will close 3 secs. after
opening of valve to consumer.
NOTE!
Selection is also avaiable through the serial link with IAS, if remote control
is selected.
5.1.3 Stopping Procedure
The system will change from consumer to atmosphere and the drier will stop
when key h/s 308 "SELECT CONSUMER" is deactivated.
Press key "STOP" (s 304) locally or remotely. At the same time as sys stop
(s304) is activated dryer will go in by-pass mode. It means item no. 17 will open
and internal valves on dryer will close. The fuel oil solenoid supply valve will
close. The fuel oil solenoid recirculation valve will open and the fuel oil pump
will stop. The oil burner will be air flushed. The S.W. inlet valve will remain open
and the air blower will remain running for a pre-set period in order to cool down
the system.
5-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
5.2 Descriptive Instructions for Plant Start and Operation

5.2.1 General
The following start instructions are identical to those presented in the foregoing
section 5.11, but gives more detailed information of the automatic sequence
initiated.
5.2.2 Normal (auto) start (Local or remote)
Press key h/s 311 "START IGG AUTO ".
Seawater supply and effluent valves will open immediately. The cooling plant
will start. Start of Seawater pump is delayed 5 secs. after opening Seawater
inlet valve.
20 secs. delayed the blower(s) will start. When both blowers are selected,
blower No. 2 will start when running signal is received from starter blower No.
1. The fuel oil pump will start, fuel oil and air capacity is set to start set-point
and the glow plug in the ignition burner will be put on after a purge time set to
3 minutes after start of the Seawater system. 50-60 seconds delayed from
activating the glow plug, fuel oil and air is supplied to the ignition burner and
ignited by the glow plug.
5 seconds later, fuel oil is supplied to the main burner through item no. 156 and
at the same time the ignition glow plug is switched off. After another 4 seconds
oil to ignition burner will be switched off together with item no. 153 (which is oil
return valve), and 10 secs. delayed air to ignition will be switched off. 20 sec.
later fuel oil and air is switched to normal capacity. The dryer will start after a
time delay on 6 min after start of cooling plant, when cooler outlet temp. is
sufficient below alarm limit which is +5c and 15 secs later the dryer by-pass
valve will close.
Check the essential temperatures and pressures.
NOTE:
The consumer valve is always dependent of the inert gas oxygen content and
dew point.
If the oxygen content is too high or too low and the dew point is too high, the
inert gas main valve will not open.
If the oxygen content should reach alarm limits during normal operation, the
atmosphere valve will open and the main valve will close, and visual and
audible alarm will be actuated. This plant has manual adjustment of the O2-
content. The operator must adjust the O2-content by setting the O2-content
limit by pressing touch key Hic204 on touch screen to the required O2 level.
5-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
The O2-content is recommended adjusted to 1% - 2%.
Keep the plant running for 15-30 min. in order to get normal running
temperatures. Check the O2-content and re-adjust, if necessary. Check the oil
return pressure, which should be around 13-15 bar.
5.2.3 Operation
When the plant is running, the operator should check, and make a record of all
values shown on the local mounted instruments. (Ref. Section 4.0).
Any abnormal values must be investigated and the fault corrected as soon as
possible.
Should the oxygen content alarm, the drier alarm or refrigerating plant alarm
sound during normal operation, the atmosphere valve will open and the main
valve will automatically close
5-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
5.3 Air Venting (local or remote)

5.3.1 Before Start
1. Carry out checks listed in section 5.10 "Before Start", items 1, 2 and 3.
2. Select blower by operation of keys "SELECT BLOWER 1" and/or
"SELECT BLOWER 2".
NOTE!NOTE: Selection is also available through the serial link with IAS,
if remote control is selected.
5.3.2 Start/Stop procedure for venting the tanks

with Air Blower
Start
Select Local or remote start by pressing "SELECT REMOTE CONTROL" (h/s

313) locally on main control panel or remotely from IAS.
Press key "START AIR PURGE" (h/s 310).
Seawater supply and effluent valves will open immediately. Cooling plant will
start. Start of Seawater pump is delayed 10 secs. after opening s.w. inlet valve.
20 secs. delayed the blower(s) will start. When all 4 blowers are selected,
blower No. 101-2, 102-2 will start when running signal is received from starter
blower No. 101-1, 102-1.
When cooling plant outlet temperature is sufficient below 5c and after time
delayed by 6 min after start of cooling plant, the dryer will start, and 17 secs.
later the dryer by-pass valve will close.
You can now press h/s 308 “SELECT CONSUMER” and the main valve item
no. 1 will open and atmosphere valve item no. 2 will close.
Stop
Press key "STOP" (s 304) and system will have a controlled shut down.
5-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Rev: 00 Date:
6. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 20150507
6.1 I.M.O. Recommendations
The following is an extract from the I.M.O. Guide-lines for Inert Gas
Systems - 1990 Edition.
6.2 General
The safety arrangements are an integral part of the inert gas system and it is
important for ship’s staff to give special attention to them during any inspection.
Inspection routines for some of the main components are dealt with in this
section.
6.3 Burner Scrubber Unit
Inspection may be made through the manholes. Checks should be made for
corrosion attacks, fouling and damage to:
• scrubber shell and bottom;

• cooling water pipes and spray nozzles (fouling);
• level switches and temperature sensors;
• other internals such as trays and demister filters.
Checks should be made for damage to non-metallic parts such as:
• internal linings;
• demisters;
• packed beds.
6.4 Refrigeration Unit
Before start of the refrigeration unit please check following:
• The drain valve of heat exchanger is opened.

• There is positive pressure in the glycol/water circulation system.
• There is oil in the sight glass for the compressor.
• There is a level of refrigeration fluid in the evaporator.
• Make sure that the oil heating of the compressor has been turned on for at
least 12 hours before start of the compressor.
• Check for leakages in the system.
6-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
6.5 Dryer Unit
Before start of dryer unit please check the following:
• Make sure heater element in dryer heater has been on for at least 12 hours
before start of dryer unit.
• Valve 512 shall not be open at start of dryer unit.
• Valve 513 must not be closed and shall be in locked position as set by
service engineer during commissioning.
6.6 Adjustment and Tolerances
6.6.1 Oil Burner
The oil atomizer position, relative to the air deflecting cone, can be adjusted by
loosening the gland nut on the burner gun carrier tube, and move the oil gun
outward or inward. The best position is easiest found if the adjustments are
made with the burner in operation, and by measuring the inert gas CO-content.
The correct position is normally indicated by a distinct drop in measured CO-
content. The best position found can be indicated on Fig. 6.3.
6.6.2 Adjustable O2-alarm
On the alarm page in the touch screen for the main control panel (item No. 233)
it is possible to adjust the O2-alarm set point. (HAC 204).
Min. setting is 1% and max. setting is 7%.
Press the touch key, a numeric pad pops up, set the alarm level and press
enter.
6.6.3 The Combustion Air System
The combustion air pressure to the main burner is indicated on pressure gauge
(item No. 161). Normal value, approx.: 0,3 - 0,7 bar at designed cap.
6.6.4 The Fuel Oil System
The fuel oil pressure to the main burner is indicated on pressure gauge (item
No. 165).
Normal values: 25 bar (g).
The pressure may be adjusted on the pressure regulating valve bypass the fuel
oil pump, but should normally not be touched, once it is set correctly on initial
commissioning. This pressure should equal a maximum oil flow of approx.
1830 kg/h.
6-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
The fuel oil capacity for normal running capacity and for start capacity is
adjusted with the pressure regulating valve item 23 in fuel oil return line,
controlled by the PLC.
6.6.5 The Gas System
Gas pressure outlet cooling tower, pressure gauge (item No. 167) should be
approx. 0,4 - 0,5 bar.
The pressure is regulated with valve, item No. 10, via P + I controller, item No.
213, where the constant pressure is set, and capacity out of blowers is
regulated by PY 7-1 and PY 7-2.
Gas temperature outlet cooling tower (item No. 192):

Max. 5°C above seawater temperature inlet.
6.6.6 The Seawater System

Water pressure in burner cooling jacket:
Pressure gauge (item No. 162): Max. 7 bar. (Without blowers.)
Water pressure to nozzles:

Pressure gauge (item No. 164): approx. 2,0 bar.
Thermometer (item No. 175): Seawater inlet temperature.
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 General
Make and types of all plant auxiliaries are listed in "PARTS LIST"
(Ref. Section 9).
The plant particulars to be checked at regular intervals as listed below, and any
defects or irregularities found must be rectified as soon as possible.
6.7.2 Items to be checked at regular intervals
In accordance with the maker's specification (ref. Section 12).
1. Electrical motors for:

Combustion air blowers
Fuel oil pump
Chiller unit
Drier regeneration fan
6-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
2. Combustion air blowers.

3. Inert gas blowers - Dryer Regeneration fan.
4. All pneumatic operated equipment such as:
Pressure controller
Valve positioners
5. Fuel oil pump.

6. Refrigeration unit compressor.
7. I.G. drier unit.
6.7.3 Other items to be checked regularly
1. Oil strainers. The filter baskets to be checked and cleaned when
necessary in petroleum, diesel oil, white spirit or similar.
2. Oil nozzles. (Main and ignition burner). The oil nozzles to be
disassembled and internals inspected as pr manual.
The intergrated oil strainer to be cleaned in petroleum, diesel oil, white
spirit etc. and blown clean with compressed air.
All openings and slots in the nozzle must show clean cut, sharp edges.
The swirl chamber and the outlet orifice to be circular with no signs of
ovality.
NOTE!
No steel or metal wire etc. must be used to open dirty or clogged
openings in the nozzle.
It is absolutely essential for good behaviour of the plant that the atomising
nozzle is in good condition.
3. Water spray nozzles.

The water spray nozzles can be inspected through sight glass in the
cooling tower. By any signs of clogging or abnormal spray, the nozzles
should be removed for inspection and cleaning.
4. Oxygen analyser.
For analyser maintenance and calibration instructions, refer to Section
11.
Ensure that the bubbler unit for cleaning of sample gas is filled with water.
6-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
NOTE!
It is important that the oxygen analyser is calibrated prior to every
start-up of the plant.
By operation at low oxygen values special attention should be paid to the

following:
a. Carefully calibrate the oxygen analyser.

b. Use a clean oil atomising nozzle in best possible condition.
c. Ensure stable running conditions.
d. Sample the gas at regular intervals.
e. The operator should always be present.
f. Make sure the sampling filter is clean.
NOTE!
The NO, NOx and CO values will normally increase by decreasing O2
content.
5. Valves and equipment.

Normally, the valves in the system do not need any regular service, but
in order to avoid sticking valves etc., it is recommended that the plant is
started for half an hour once a week.
6.7.4 Set points
The various set points for pressure and temperature switches are listed in
Section 10. Alarm/stop description..
6-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
6-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
6.8 Maintenance Intervals
General
Make and types of all plant auxiliaries are listed in “PARTS LIST” (Ref. section
9).
The plant particulars to be checked at regular intervals as listed below and any
defects or irregularities found must be rectified as soon as possible.
NOTE!
In General the plant shall be started and run for two hours every 2nd week. By
doing so the moving parts will be kept lubricated, especially the glands and
valves.
The desiccant (activated alumina) in the dryer also needs to be regenerated
(dried out) for as long as it takes to complete the regeneration process, but
remember to regenerate the vessles no 1 and 2 every other time.
COMPONENT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

IG generator isolating valves Operate the valves Before start up
Clean with compressed air of steam Dry docking
Dismantle for inspection and clean
Scrubber Fresh water flushing After use
Cleaning demister Three months
Dismantling of level switch and Six months
temperature probes for inspection.
Open for full internal inspection. Dry docking
Sea water spray nozzles, removal Min. each 3rd month
for cleaning.
Overboard pipes and valve from Dismantling of the valve for Dry docking repair period.
scrubber overhaul, inspection of pipeline and
overboard end.
Blowers Vibration check. While running.
Internal inspection through hatches. Every six months.
Dismantling for full overhaul of Two years or more frequently if
bearings shaft tightening and other required.
necessary work.
Pressure/Vacuum valves Operating and lubricating. Six months.
Opening for full internal inspection. One year.
Deck isolating valve Open for overhaul One year
Gas pressure regulating system Removal of condensation in Before start.
instrument, air supply.
Opening of gas pressure regulating As appropriate.
valves for overhaul.
Calibrate positioner. Each month
6-7
Wärtsilä Moss AS

Oil nozzles. (Main and ignition The oil nozzles to be disassembled Regularly
burner) and internals inspected.
The integrated oil strainer to be
cleaned in petroleum, diesel oil,
white spirit etc. and blown clean with
compressed air.
All openings and slots in the nozzle

must show clean cut, sharp edges.
The swirl chamber and the outlet
orifice to be circular with no signs of
ovality.
NOTE! No steel or metal wire etc.

must be used to open dirty or
clogged openings in the nozzle. It is
absolutely essential for good
behaviour of the plant that the
atomising nozzle is in good
condition.
Oil strainers The filter baskets to be checked and Regularly
cleaned when necessary in petro-
leum, diesel oil, white spirit or
similar.
Water spray nozzles The water spray nozzles can be Regularly
inspected through sight glass in the
cooling tower. By any signs of
clogging or abnormal spray, the
nozzles should be removed for
inspection and cleaning.
Electrical motors for: Generally check for vibration and Regularly
Combustion air blower any abnormal operation/noise?
Fuel oil pump
Dryer regeneration blower
Combustion air blowers, V-belt drive Change filter and oil. Regularly.
and Coupling drive Check the V-belts tension.
Fuel oil pump Check pressure-relief valves. Check Regularly
and clean filter.
6-8
Wärtsilä Moss AS

R407C/R404A Screw compressor Check and logging of level, flow While running.
temperatures and pressure.
Check and logging oil/Freon level,
check pressure on chill water pump
in/out
Test complete plant thoroughly for Every 2nd week
refrigerant leaks.
Test automatic controls and safety Monthly
devices.
Examine condenser corrosion plugs Every third month
and replace of necessary.
Oil cooler tubes to be examined. Every sixth month
Depressurise compressor set. This Yearly

should be done after having
measured the pressure loss across
the fine oil filters in the oil-separator.
Do this by measuring the pressure
after the fine oil filters using a
suitable gauge, compare it with the
HP gauge on the unit. Pressure
drop should not exceed 1 bar.
Shut down plant and drain oil from
compressor and separator. Clean oil
filter and refill with the correct
charge of new (not reclaimed)oil of
the same grade. Note that the oil is
hydrofobic. Opened cans will
absorbe moisture. Use only new oil
from sealed containers.
Inspect oil cooler and condenser
tubes. This inspection to be carried
out annually. Examine coupling.
Condenser tubes to be examined.
All refrigerant and liquid pipes, After 20.000 hours operation

vessels, coil terminals in
condensers and evaporators, shells
of condenser, heat exchangers and
other pressure parts of the
equipment to be examined
externally as far as is practicable.
Compressor to be opened and the
rotors and bearings examined.
Renew coupling membrane units. After 30.000 hours operation

Compressor is to be completely After 40.000 hours operation.
overhauled. Examine oil pump and
renew parts if necessary.
Symptoms indicating choking of At any time

compressor suction strainers, fine
oil filters, oil filters and the fouling of
tubes in water cooled heat
exchange vessels should be given
immediate attention. Excessive oil
leakage from compressor input
shaft seal.
6-9
Wärtsilä Moss AS

Suction filter Take out filter sock and replace it After approx 80 hours
with filter strainer
All above mentioned procedures,
are to be done by competent
engineer.
I.G. dryer unit:
Activated Alumina Regenerate (dry out) for as long as Every 2nd week
it takes to complete the regeneration
process, otherwise the desiccant
will reach saturation point.
Dryer regeneration blower Check for vibration and lubricate el. One year
motor with grease
All pneumatic operated equipment Regularly
such as:
Pressure controller
Valve positioners
Valves and equipment In order to avoid sticking valves Start the plant for half an hour once
every 2nd week.
O2-analyser panel Check bubble unit and filter. Each month
Replace water/add water
Wash filter and or replace.
By operation at low oxygen values It is important that the oxygen

special attention should be paid to analyser is calibrated prior to every
the following: start-up of the plant, following a
a) Carefully calibrate the oxygen shut-down period of more than 8
analyser. hours.
b) Use a clean oil atomising nozzle
in best possible condition.
c) Ensure stabel running conditions.
d) Sample the gas at regular
intervals.
e) The operator should always be
present.
6-10
Wärtsilä Moss AS
6.9 Lubrication Oil Chart

WARNING!DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPE OF OIL / GREASE
FUCHS:
No. of Kind of lubrication Amount Unit (l Remark or Change
Application Point
set/ship oil/grease (Per Set) or kg) Interval
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR RENISO TRITON SE 25 Liter 1st at 10000 h, every after
(REFCOMP) 170
at 40000 h.
The oil filter has to be
inspected and/or changed
after 50-100 hours.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON NOT APPLICABLE
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR BLOWER
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR DRYER FAN
MOBIL:
Application Point
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR MOBIL EAL ARTIC 25 Liter 1st at 10000 h, every after
(REFCOMP) 220 at 40000 h.
after 50-100 hours.
1 GREASE NIPPLES ON MOBILTH SHC 100 0.1 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR OF ELEC. MOBIL Polyrex EM2 hours of operation or every
MOTOR DRYER FAN 6 month, whatever comes
first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON MOBILTH SHC 100 0.14 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR MOBIL Polyrex EM2 hours of operation or every
OF ELEC. MOTOR AIR 6 month, whatever comes
FAN first.
6-11
Wärtsilä Moss AS
TOTAL / FINA / ELF:

Application Point
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR PLANETELF ACD 150 25 Liter 1st at 10000 h, every after
(REFCOMP) at 40000 h.
after 50-100 hours.
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR DRYER FAN
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR AIR FAN
CASTROL /ESSO:
Application Point
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR ICEMATIC SW 220 25 Liter 1st at 10000 h, every after
(REFCOMP) HT EU at 40000 h.
after 50-100 hours.
2 GREASE NIPPLES ON UNIREX N2, N3 OR 0.1 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR OF ELEC. S2 hours of operation or every
first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON UNIREX N2, N3 OR 0.14 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR OF ELEC. S2 hours of operation or every
MOTOR AIR FAN 6 month, whatever comes
first.
CPI:
Amoun
No. of Kind of lubrication Unit (l Remark or Change
Application Point t (Per
set/ship oil/grease or kg) Interval
Set)
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR EMKARATE RL 220H 25 Liter 21st at 10000 h, every
(REFCOMP) SOLEST 120 after at 40000 h.
SOLEST 170 inspected and/or changed
SOLEST 220 after 50-100 hours.
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR DRYER FAN
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR AIR FAN
6-12
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHEVRON/TEXACO:
Amoun
Set)
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR Capella HFC 220 NA 25 Liter 1st at 10000 h, every after
(REFCOMP) at 40000 h.
after 50-100 hours.
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR DRYER FAN
MOTOR OF ELEC.
MOTOR AIR FAN
SKF:
Amoun
Set)
1 SCREW COMPRESSOR NOT APPLICABLE
(REFCOMP)
1 GREASE NIPPLES ON SKF LGHQ 3 0,1 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR OF ELEC. hours of operation or every
first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON SKF LGHQ 3 0.14 Kg Regreasing every 400
first.
SHELL:
Amoun
Set)
(REFCOMP)
1 GREASE NIPPLES ON ALBIDA EMS 2 0,1 Kg Regreasing every 400
first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON ALBIDA EMS 2 0,14 Kg Regreasing every 400
first.
6-13
Wärtsilä Moss AS
KLÜBER:
Amoun
Set)
(REFCOMP)
1 GREASE NIPPLES ON KLÜBERPLEX BEM 0,1 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR 41-132 hours of operation or every
OF ELEC. MOTOR 6 month, whatever comes
DRYER FAN first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON KLÜBERPLEX BEM 0,14 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR 41-132 hours of operation or every
FAN first.
FAG:
Amoun
Set)
(REFCOMP)
1 GREASE NIPPLES ON ARCANOL TEMP110 0,1 Kg Regreasing every 400
first.
4 GREASE NIPPLES ON ARCANOL TEMP110 0,14 Kg Regreasing every 400
MOTOR hours of operation or every
FAN first.
6-14
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 7 - POSSIBLE FAULTS CAUSES - START/OPERATIONS
Rev: 00 Date:
7. SOME POSSIBLE CAUSES TO FAULTS DURING START AND 20150507
OPERATION
7.1 If control current is not on:
a. Check that fuses are all right.
b. Check that circuit breaker in main switchboard is "ON".
7.2 If ignition does not take place:
a. Check fuel oil flow.
b. Check that "COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE" inlet/outlet is correct.
c. Check and clean oil nozzle in ignition burner.
d. Check that the ignition glow plug is glowing.
e. Check fuse for glow plug in power distribution.
f. Check that the opening on the air supply valve item 62 for ignition burner
is open 1 ¾ turn.
g. Check and clean main oil nozzle and oil system for possible clogging.
7.3 If fuel oil pressure is too low:
a. Check that oil supply valve is open from tank.
b. Check that fuel oil pump is running. Fuel oil pump must never run without
oil supply.
c. Check that valves are correctly adjusted.
d. Change oil filter with the built-in 3-way valve.
7.4 If seawater pressure is too low:
a. Check the seawater supply system.
b. Check that the pressure gauge, pressure switch and pipes are all right,
and not clogged by salt.
7.5 If seawater level in cooling tower is too high:
a. Check that seawater pressure inlet is approx. 2.0 bar.
b. Check that the seawater line is without any restriction and the seawater
overboard valve is fully open.
7-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 7 - POSSIBLE FAULTS CAUSES - START/OPERATIONS
7.6 If inert gas temperature is higher than approx. 5°C

above seawater inlet temperature:
a. Check that seawater pressure is approx. 2.0 bar.
b. Clean the seawater spray nozzles.
c. Check demister and wet filter.
7.7 If the O2 content increases, and the fuel oil consumption
is below normal:
a. Check that oil pressure is approx. 25 bar.
b. Check and clean main oil nozzle.
c. Check if all regulating valves are operating smoothly (item Nos. 7-1, 7-2,
10)
7.8 If the instrument air pressure is too low:
a. Check the instrument air supply system:
Air pressure should be 70-100 psi.
7-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
Rev: 01 Date:
8. INERT GAS DRYER 20080527
8.1 TECHNICAL DATA

8.1.1 General
Working automatic
Min/max ambient temperature 0/+45 °C
Area classification Safe area / non hazardous
8.1.2 Cycle
Cycle time of dryer 16 hours
Drying time per adsorber 8 hours
Heating time Max. 5,5 hours, ended by thermostat TT582
Cooling time 60 minutes
Purge time 75 minutes
Parallel drying time 14 min
Stand-by time Up to 8 hours total drying time per adsorber,
depending on heating time used.
8.1.3 Operating condition

Medium Inert gas / air
Inlet pressure nom. 0,30 - 0,40 bar (g)
Pressure drop over dryer 0,05 - 0,10 barg
Inlet temperature nom. +5 °C
Outlet pressure dewpoint -45 °C max
8.1.4 Construction
Dryer towers Carbon steel
Piping Stainless steel AISI 316L
Desiccant Activated Alumina
Insulation Included
8.1.5 Setpoints
TT 571-1/571-2 190 °C switching off one heating element group (set in
PLC)*
TT 582 120 °C End of Regeneration (set in PLC)*
TAh 526 350 °C*
*(These adjustments are to be made by a commission engineer at start-up.)
8-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

8.2.1 General
(Please refer to the appropriate P&I Diagram)
The installation is designed for continuous operation by means of a twin
adsorber system. One adsorber dries the incoming inert gas (air), while the
other adsorber is regenerated.
The following description is based on adsorption in vessel No. 1 and

regeneration in vessel No. 2.
8.2.2 Adsorption
The wet inert gas is directed through (nozzle) N01 and (valve) V501 to the top
of vessel Ads.1.
Both vessels are filled with desiccant, which has the physical property to
adsorb the water vapour from the inert gas. The dried gas leaves the vessel at
the bottom, and is directed outside the dryer through V503 and N02. The type
and quantity of the desiccant has been selected in such a way that the drying
can be effected during the stated time. When the desiccant becomes saturated
with water, it has to be regenerated (dried out) while the drying process
continues in the other adsorption vessel.
8.2.3 Regeneration and Switching over

Regeneration is accomplished by heated ambient air in an open circuit. The air
is sucked by the fan and is led through the heater, where the temperature is
increased to a pre-set value. The regeneration air is thereafter directed to the
topside of the adsorption vessel Ads. 2, and led through the desiccant bed
where moisture is removed from the adsorbent.
Thereafter the wet air leaves the vessel at the bottom, and is exhausted to
atmosphere through N03. Completion of the regeneration process is indicated
by a marked increase in the exhaust air temperature, and the heating cycle is
terminated by temperature transmitter TT582 at a pre-set value.
The desiccant must now be cooled down and re-conditioned for adsorption.
This is done in two stages, first by ambient air from the fan, followed by a period
of purging with refrigerated Inert Gas.
The amount of purging gas is adjustable, to ensure that the desiccant has been
cooled down to the desired temperature by the end of the pre-set purging time.
Finally there will be a short period of parallel running, where Inert Gas from the
cooling plant is divided between the two vessels, before the process is
repeated on vessel Ads. 1.
8-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
When the dryer is switched off line, or where regeneration is carried out
manually without running the IG generator/cooling plant, the regeneration
process will continue up to the point where purging is due to commence.
8.2.4 Temperature indication

The following indicators are mounted on the dryer:
TI 571-1/TI 571-2: Temperature inlet Ads 1/Ads 2.

TI 582: Regeneration gas outlet temperature adsorber Ads 1 and Ads 2.
TI574: Temperature inlet cooler
TI576: Temperature outlet cooler
8.2.5 Pressure indication
Two pressure indicators (PI 561-1 and PI 561-2) are installed at the inlet to the
adsorbers.
8-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.3 CONTROL SYSTEM

8.3.1 General
The Inert Gas Dryer is controlled by the PLC in the dryer control panel. All
sequential control of the valves, heaters, time periods, set points, alarm levels
etc. are stored in, and controlled, by this PLC.
8.3.2 Alarms
In case of a failure or malfunction, the specific alarm lamp on the dryer control
panel will light red.
In case of too long regeneration time, the warning lamp on the dryer control
panel will light orange.
8.3.3 Switches
Remote/Local: By means of this switch the dryer package can
be started from a remote position.
Regeneration Fan Heating: Activates heating element in fan motor.
Select Steam Heater: Enables the steam heater (if installed) to be

used in stead of the electrical heater.
Select El. Topping Up: The electrical heater can be used (at a
reduced power setting) in combination with
the steam heater to increase the temperature
if the steam pressure is low.
Manual Regeneration: The Inert Gas Dryer can be regenerated

manually, without operating the rest of the
Inert Gas Generator.
Alarm Reset: When an alarm has occured, it can be

accepted and reset on the control panel.
Lamp test: When pushing this button all lamps on the

control box will light up.
8-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.4 ADJUSTMENTS
8.4.1 Regeneration air temperature
The best temperature for regeneration is 180 °C. The temperature can be read
on temperature indicators TI-571-1/TI-571-2.
The flow and the temperature of the regeneration air is adjusted by valve 512.
This is done as follows:
Valve 512 is set at in full open position. Because of the high flow, the
regeneration air temperature will be lower than given value of regeneration
temperature. By throttling valve 512 more, the temperature downstream the
heater will increase. When reaching the desired value, this valve must be fixed.
Please note that adjustments have to be made slowly.
If the regeneration temperature reaches 190 °C, one of the heater element
groups will be switched off in order to protect the heater. This may result in an
extended regeneration time, and should be avoided.
8.4.2 Heater safety thermostat TAh-526

This thermostat is mounted in electric heater Item 526. The element of the
thermostat is located between the heater elements.
8-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.5 MAINTENANCE
The dryer maintenance is reduced to a minimum, but the following points must
be checked according to below mentioned maintenance schedule.
8.5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance and repair are only to be performed under the supervision of an
authorised person.
1. Only use the appropriate tool for maintenance and repair.

2. Only use original replacement parts.
3. Maintenance is only to be performed when the dryer is shut down and
depressurised and the main power is turned off.
4. Before dismantling a part under pressure, disconnect the pressure
sources and vent the internal pressure of the system.
5. Proceed carefully during maintenance and repair. Prevent dirt from
entering by covering parts and orifices with clean cloth, paper or tape.
6. Never leave tools, loose parts or cleaning rags in or on the dryer.
7. Check operating pressures, temperatures and time setting after
maintenance or revision. If operating and safety devices function
properly, the dryer can be released.
8. Check the condition of the insulation material of the dryer. If it is not in
good condition, replace the damaged material.
8.5.2 Desiccant
The lifetime of the desiccant depends on operation hours and production.
Additionally the desiccant is sensitive to contamination, such as excessive soot
content in the inert gas.
The adsorption capacity of the desiccant depends on operation hours and load.
Under normal conditions the lifetime of the desiccant is minimum 5 years.
8-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.5.3 Maintenance schedule

Monthly:
Check inlet temperature and pressure

Check regeneration air temperature
Check air leakage s on flanges, valves and solenoid valves
Check electrical cabling for poor or loose connections
Every 6 months:
Lubricate regeneration fan bearings.

8.5.4 Change of desiccant
1. Switch off power
2. Make sure the adsorber is depressurised before opening any access
hatches.
3. Remove the desiccant by opening the drain port at the bottom of the
vessel. The desiccant has to be collected in drums or bags.
4. Check the bottom strainers in the adsorbers.
5. Fill the adsorber with desiccant.
6. Use new gaskets for assembly.
7. Start the dryer and carry out manual regeneration of both vessels.
8.5.5 Ordering Spare Parts
For ordering spare parts please refer to the Hamworthy Moss AS part number,
type of dryer and serial number.
8-7
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
8.6 TROUBLE SHOOTING

8.6.1 Trouble Shooting List
When the Inert Gas dryer does not function according to conditions as
mentioned in the documentation, the following can be helpful. At malfunction
of components, first reset any alarms, the connection from or to the PLC to the
component should also be checked electrically and/or pneumatically. I.e.a.
fuse, wire or solenoid, etc. can also be defective.
WARNING:Before dryer can be repaired, make sure that the dryer is

depressurized and that the power supply is switched off.
Failure Possible causes Remedy

Dewpoint too high Inlet temperature or dewpoint Check Inert Gas outlet tempera-
too high. ture from cooler is below + 5 °C
Desiccant is not fully reactivated Replace desiccant.
or cooled down.
Check drains and demister on
Dryer does not switch. heat exchanger on cooling plant,
Both vessels under pressure. Check for possible carry-over at
Desiccant is contaminated or inlet.
aged.
Carry-over from cooling plant.
Fan thermal overload Voltage too low. Check the voltage.
Motor burned out. Replace motor.
Malfuntion valve flow over both Check valves.
adsorbers. Fasten terminals of motor, check
Valve 512 needs resetting. power cable.
Motor wires are not properly
connected.
Regeneration temperature too high Outlet temperature heaters too Valve 512 needs resetting.
high. Check cooler and cooling water
Cooler 527 outlet temperature supply. (if applicable)
higher than normal. (if installed) Check valves.
Valve is leaking. Check the PT-100 element and
The temperature transmitter its transmitter.
TT-571 out of order. Check fan.
Fan not working properly.
ICG Trip Malfunction of machine Check and restart machine
(Gen Alarm customer) upstream dryer. upstream dryer.
8-8
Wärtsilä Moss AS
CHAPTER 8 - GENERAL
Failure Possible causes Remedy

Heating time too long Heater 526 is not working. Check the electrical heater
Fan out of order or not working operation and its current.
properly. Adjust valve 512.
Steamheater 525 not working, or Check the working and rotation
steam pressure too low. of the fan.
(if applicable) Reset circuit breaker.
Check the temp. Transmitter
TT582.
Check steam heater, steam
pressure. (if applicable)
Valve failure Pilot air pressure too low. Increase the pressure.
(Alarm) Solenoid valve is not working. Check and replace the defective
(See also indicators on the butterfly solenoid valve.
valves. Disc of butterfly too tight in its
seat. Increase the pilot air pressure.
Check the valve.
Dryer is switched on, but lamps do Power supply is not active. Check the voltage between ter-
not light-up. Automatic breaker switched off. minals in the terminal block.
Transformer defective. Reset the current breaker.
Fuse of transformer defective. Check and replace the defective

transformer.
Replace this fuse.
Regenerated adsorber is not cooled Fan is not running. Check circuit breaker and reset
down sufficient after heating period. Fan motor is defective. it.
Thermal overload fan. Replace the fan motor.
Insufficient cooling water to Increase cooling water flow.

cooler 527. Increase opening of valve 513.
Valve 513 not sufficiently
opened.
Pressure drop excessive Butterfly valve is not fully open. Replace desiccant.
Desiccant is disintegrated or
aged.
8-9
Type of document: Document no.
Technical Specification Wärtsi_Spesi_02988-3000
Wärtsil.doc/TRE
Customer: Issued by: Date of issue: Rev. No. Rev. Date Approved by Page
Wärtsilä Moss AS IK/TRE 22.01.2013 1 of 4
Customer ref.: Subject: Ref. No.
Geir Larssen Refrigerating machinery for aircondition 02988-3000
DSME H2405 615kW R407C FW TCN
|
DESCRIPTION OF THE PLANT
The refrigeration machinery for the inert gas cooling system is based on using chilled water.
There will be delivered one chilled water package unit.
Dimensioning data:
Required capacity : Totally 615 kW

Refrigeration capacity : 1 x 615 kW
Fresh water temp. : +36oC at condenser inlet
Tot. fresh water demand : 125 m3/h
Refrigerant primary : R-407c
Refrigerant secondary : Fresh water/glycol 25%
Chilled water in/out : +3,5°C/-0,5°C.
Chilled water demand : 140 m3/h
Class requirement : LR
The chiller package will be delivered as a factory assembled unit in marine execution,
consisting of 1 semi hermetic type screw compressor, 1 fresh-cooled condenser and 1
water-chiller with two refrigerant circuits. Further the unit is equipped with necessary
regulating- and safety devices, as well as internal piping and electric wiring. All assembled
on steel base frames.
The compressor is equipped with automatic capacity regulation, shut off valves for suction
and discharge, built in suction strainer, oil level glass and crankcase heater. Further the
compressors are protected by means of safety devices controlling high-, low- and
oilpressure.
The condenser is in horizontal Shell & Tube, freshwater-cooled marine design.

For protection against corrosion, the water end-covers equipped with corrosion plugs.
The water-chiller will be designed as direct expansion Shell & Tube evaporator with two
separate R-407c circuits. The principle of operation is that water is passing on the shell side
of the chiller and refrigerant evaporating inside the innertubes and thus cooling the
circulating fresh water. Refrigerant feed to the chiller is primary done by one electronic
expansion valve.
The chiller is equipped with necessary thermostats, flow-switches etc for proper and safe
operation.
The water-chiller package is provided with an electric control panel mounted on the unit
which includes PLC-controlled electronic capacity regulator, amp. meters, hour counter,
electronic thermostat and starter for chilled water pump.
Further necessary switches and signal lamps for indication of function or malfunction.
Potential free contacts for common alarm to be included.
For low load operation the compressor is equipped with hot gas injection valves.
For further details, please see enclosed technical specification.

Wärtsil.doc/TRE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Item Qty
1 1 Teknotherm Water-chiller package, consisting of the following
main components:
1 Screw compressors, open type, with following data:

Make/type : Bitzer
Refr. capacity : 644 kW
Evapor./cond.temp. : -6,5°C/+52°C
Capacity control : Stepless
Power consumption : 291 kW
R.p.m. : 3500
COP : 2,21
1 Electric motor.
There are six PTC temperature sensors.
Temperature rise :B
Enclosure : IP.54
Voltage, main : 3 x 440V-60Hz
pilot : 1 x 220V-60Hz
R.p.m. : 3550
LRA : 2520A (D)
1 Condenser make Teknotherm/Alfa Laval

Shell & tube type with shell of carbon steel, inner tubes of Cu, endplates of
stainless steel (SIS 2343) and waterheads of cast iron with corrosion plugs.
The condensers are equipped with R-407C safety relief valves, service valves,
drain and purge valve.
.
Capacity : 994 kW
Water amount : 125 m3/h
Pressure drop : 35 kPa
Temp. water in/out : 36°C/42,9°C
Wärtsil.doc/TRE
Item Qty.
1 Gauge panel, with:

HP-. LP- gauges for the compressors.
1 Water chiller in horizontal Shell & Tube design for direct expansion of
refrigerant with 2 refrigerant circuits. With shell of carbon steel St.37.0,
innertubes of CU, endplates and covers of steel HII.
Cooling capacity : 615 kW

Evapor. temp. : -5,5°C
Water temp. in/out : +3,5°C/-0,5°C
Water flow : 140 m3/h
Pressure loss : 66 kPa
Water type : Freshwater/glycol 25%
1 Set Valves for water chiller.

Consisting of 2 electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves and stop valves.
Internal piping for refrigerant and oil. Each unit is painted in marine execution
accordance to Teknotherm standard.
1 Starter/control panels, as comprise of:

1 DOL starter for compressor motor
2 Expansion valve controller type Danfoss
1 PLC
Complete with necessary contactors, relays, fuses, switches etc. incl. starter
for chilled water pump. Amp.meters and hour counters are included.
All failure signals to be connected to common pot. free terminals.
Main voltage : 3 x 440V-60Hz

Pilot voltage : 1 x 230V-60Hz
1 Necessary terminal boxes.
Above equipment - item 1 - is mounted on a steel base frame

ecified color.
---------------------------------------
Wärtsil.doc/TRE
Item Qty.
2 1 Differential pressure transmitter for chilled water circuit.
3 First charge with compressor oil.
4 Instruction books in English.
5 1 Set Spare parts for the plant
6 1 set Vibration damper
--------------------------------
Teknotherm's delivery does not include:
Liquid sub-cooler
Installation of the refrigeration plant
Commissioning and start-up of the plant after installation onboard
Installation of apparatuses
Delivery of electric cables other than mounted on the unit
Foundations with necessary mounting, irons and bolts etc.
Flexible connections in water or refrigerating tubes
Drilling and cutting through bulkheads and decks
Water piping and manifolds for condenser
Condenser cooling water pumps w/starter, valves and piping
Chilled water piping system with expansion tanks with valves and metering
device
Bushing through bulkheads and decks
Insulation and insulation works of chilled water pipes
Fasteners for pipelines
Protection of machinery of pipelines if necessary
Painting of any parts for the plant after despatch
Pressure air, nitrogen and water, light etc. that are necessary during
installation and testing of the plant
Refrigerant leakage system alarm or neither sensors
Environmental duties for refrigerant
Any additional cost for transport restrictions of dangerous goods
Transport from quay to shipyard
Bringing onboard of materials or transportation at the yard
Alignment of the units after despatch from our factory
Any item not specially mentioned in the technical specification
Any classification costs for the complete plant onboard
Seawater valve
Refrigerant
Document no.
Configuration
Teknotherm refrigerating machinery Parameters Standard
WC Version 3.3
Issue: Rev. No. Rev. Page
www.teknotherm.com Version 3.3 06.102011 1 of 7
Configuration Parameters
Teknotherm Air Condition Control System
Preface
water chiller control system is made to be configured.
During a configuration wizard the control system is adapted to the actual air
condition plant.
It is most important that the configuration is done carefully and correctly. An

erroneously configuration may result in a control system that does not work properly
or does not work at all. The configuration should only be done by qualified staff.
During the configuration it is possible to disable safety functions. Erroneously

disabled safety functions may result in damage to equipment or even injury or death
to humans and other living organisms.
Because of these issues the configuration wizard is password protected. The
f members. Anyone who knows
the password is responsible to prevent the password going astray.
Configuration of chiller by using display

1. press the exclamation point to get the Configuration menu.
1
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
2.
3. menu is for configuration of

the compressors sensors
and options (HP, LP ,TT
cap.reg. etc .)
configuration of the unit.

(Scaling of temperature
sensors og differensial
pressure and calibration.
2
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
IO Configuration
Parameter Valid range Setting
Sensor Inlet Temp -50 +50 -50 +50
Enable Inlet Sensor Enable/Disable Enable
Sensor Outlet Temp -50 +50 -50 +50
Sensor Diff.Pressure 0.00 1.60 0.00-1.60
Enable Diff.Pressure Enable/Disable Enable
Sensor
3
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
IO Configuration Compressor

Sensor Discharge -1 to 34 - 1 to 34
Pressure
Sensor Suction Pressure -1 to 12 -1 to 12
Sensor Discharge -50 +150 -50 to 150
Temperature
Enable Discharge Enable/Disable Enable
Temperature
Sensor Oil Pressure -1 to 34 NOT AVAILABLE
Enable Oil Pressure Enable/Disable Disable
Sensor Motor Current 0 to 1000 0 to 600
Sensor Pump Current 0 to 1000 0 to 50
Enable Pump Current Enabel/Disable Enable
4
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
5
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
Cap.Reg Configuration

Stepless Enable/Disable Enable
Min Load Time Pulse 500-1000 ms 700
Max Load Time Pulse 500-1000 ms 800
Min Unload Time Pulse 500-1000 ms 400
Max Unload Time Pulse 500-1000 ms 500
Capacity step 0: (25%) NA
+ Enable Step
+ Enable Step
+ Enable Step
+ Enable Step
6
Document no.
Configuration
WC Version 3.3
Enable Component

Enable Liquid Injection Enable/Disable + time Disable
Time Delay delay (60s)
Enable Liquid Injection Enable/Disable + Enable 110C + 10C
Temperature Temperature and
Hysteresis
Enable Start Unloader Enable/Disable Disable
Enable Oil Level Enable Disable Disable
Enable Oil Flow Enable/Disable Enable
Enable Motor Protection Enable/Disable Enable
Relay
Enable Economizer Enable/Disable Disable
Signature: _______Christer Østbye ____ Date: ___11.03.2012____
7
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE
Teknotherm Marine refrigerating machinery
Issued: Rev. No. Rev. Page

www.teknotherm.com 08.04.2008 A 20.11.2013/StS 1 of 43
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TEKNOTHERM MARINE WATER CHILLER UNIT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
WATER CHILLER PLANT
R407C/R134a
List of contents:
Principle of refrigeration, page 2
Operating instruction, page 4
Start-up instructions, page 7
Functional description, page 9
Maintenance, page 13
General seeking for defects, page 18
Safety, page 20
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

PRINCIPLE OF REFRIGERATION
This plant operates according to the general principles of the vapour compression system. This system is basis
for all refrigerating plants using a mechanical compressor to raise the pressure of refrigerant vapour
evaporated by the absorption of heat, to a level where liquefaction can take place in the condenser.
Whilst every effort is made to design and manufacture a plant which is reliable and efficient, it is essential that
engineers must have an understanding of the principles involved and of the construction of component parts.
This will enable them to operate the plant in a manner that will ensure optimum results. At the same time it is
most important that if trouble arise, the cause is quickly and accurately diagnosed. Failure to appreciate the
nature of such trouble can very easily result in a major fault developing, or even permanent damage to the
installation.
The object of this instruction manual is to give sufficient information to operating engineers to enable them to
understand the construction and operation of the plant and to make the necessary adjustments required to
ensure normal functioning. Routine maintenance and running repairs are also covered.
Refrigeration is the transfer of heat from the substance to be cooled to some other substance. As heat flows
naturally from a relatively warm body to a colder one which it is in contact, refrigeration is a simple matter
when a supply of cooling medium at a lower temperature than the substance to be refrigerated is available.
.
When heat is to be induced to flow from a cold substance to a relatively warmer one, the necessary transfer of
heat cannot be achieved without a more complicated procedure involving the expenditure of energy. It is
process of this kind that is usually implied when the term refrigeration is used.
During the refrigeration process, the refrigerant undergoes a number of changes in state or condition, and
various terms are used to indicate when and how these are achieved.
Latent Heat
This is the amount of heat that must be added to a unit weight of a substance, to change its state from a solid
to a liquid (latent heat of fusion) or from a liquid to a vapour (latent heat of vapourization). It is used to bring
about a change of state and does not result in a change of temperature.
Sensible Heat
Sensible heat is that which results in a change of temperature.
Vapour Pressure
Every liquid produces a vapour, which, if contained within a vessel exerts a pressure to the containing walls.
The amount of pressure exerted by the vapour of any particular liquid, is dependent solely upon the
temperature of the liquid surface; the higher the temperature, the greater the pressure. For any liquid a graph
can be drawn showing the relationship between the vapour pressure and the temperature of the liquid
surface.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

PRINCIPLE OF REFRIGERATION
Condensation
When heat is removed from a gas, its temperature is lowered until it reaches the value corresponding to the
pressure, after which further removal of heat will cape it to condensate. Alternatively, if the pressure is
increased combined with the removal of heat, the gas can be condensated without reducing its temperature.
Superheated Vapour
Vapour that is removed from contact with its liquid, and is at a higher temperature than that which
corresponds to its pressure as shown by the pressure - temperature relationship is superheated.
The Vapour Compression System

The fundamental facts upon which the vapour compression system depends are:.
(1) The conversion of the refrigerant from a liquid to a vapour form (evaporation) involving the absorption
by the refrigerant of a considerable quantity of heat (latent heat).
(2) For a given refrigerant, the temperature at which evaporation or condensation takes place depends only
on the pressure prevailing, and can be varied by varying the pressure.
The principal components of the refrigerating system are:
(a) The compressor

(b) The condenser
(c) The expansion valve
(d) The evaporator
The compressor, by removing the refrigerant vapour as fast as it is farmed, maintains the required
pressure in the evaporator. It also raises the pressure of the refrigerant to a level sufficiently high to
enable the condenser to perform its function.
In the condenser, the heat is transferred from the hot compressed refrigerant vapour to the cooling
medium, usually water or air, and the refrigerant is liquefied. The same refrigerant is returned to the
evaporator and used again, the cycle of evaporation, compression and condensation being repeated
indefinitely. For condensation to take place, the compressor must be capable of raising the pressure of
the refrigerant to such a level that the corresponding saturation temperature is higher than the
temperature of the cooling medium.
The expansion valve controls the rate at which the refrigerant is circulated through the evaporator. The
rate must be such that the amount admitted to the evaporator in a given time is just as much as the
heat absorbed by the latter can vaporize.
The temperature of the liquid refrigerant in the evaporator is that corresponding to the pressure
prevaiIing. As this temperature is lower than that of the medium to be cooled, the refrigerant absorbs
heat from the latter and is thereby vaporized.
The foregoing basic principles apply to all vapour compression forms of refrigeration
.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

OPERATING INSTRUCTION
THE REFRIGERATING SYSTEM
Reference is made to instruction manual for compressor, showing and explaining the compressor in detail and
the system description for the control system.
We also want to give the following additional information regarding items to be observed during start up and
running for this plant.
1. Evaporating temperature
For evaporating temperature see PLC set point table and technical specification for specific project.
2. Condensing temperature
For condensing temperature see PLC set point table and technical specification for specific project
3. Low and high pressure :
The compressors are equipped with pressure transmitter type Danfoss AKS for high pressure and low
pressure. The PLC-program will control the safety of the condensing unit in the following way:
The low pressure is set to stop the compressor at a pressure of approx. 2,5 bar (See PLC set point table
for this application)
The high pressure alarm protects the compressors against too high operating pressure, which can occur
if there is no or insufficient cooling water, closed valves on the pressure side, over-charge with
refrigerant, or malfunction on the sea water valve (if delivered).
(See PLC set point table for this application)
NOTE! If the compressors have been stopped by the high-pressure alarm, the reason for this must be
checked before the compressor is started again. A alarm history list is available in the display.
The oil pressure alarm stops the compressor automatically .The compressor will stop immediately if the
oil pressure goes below alarm setting under normal operation. This setting is not available, but pre-set
in the common alarm compressor relay.
If the oil pressure falls during normal running conditions under the setting the compressor will stop as
well.
All these alarms must bee manually reset before the compressor can start again.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

4. High oil and high discharge temperature:
The compressors are equipped with temperature sensors for high discharge temperature.
(See PLC set point table)
The high oil temperature alarm normally stops the compressor.

This setting is not available, but pre-set in the common alarm compressor relay.
The high discharge temperature alarm stops the compressor and manages the liquid injection for
cooling of the compressor. (See PLC set point table for this application)
5. Oil heater/ level switch
On the compressor there is installed an oil heater for the compressor unit.
The heater shall only be in operation during the stop of compressor to avoid refrigerant to be absorbed
in the oil.
The time of operation before starting of compressors is 12hrs.
The level switch will give alarm if the oil level in the oil separator goes below the float valve.
6. Drier:
To absorb moisture and contamination in the system there are mounted driers in the liquid lines. The
sight glass
cores.
7. Replacement of parts in the system:
At replacement of expansion valves, solenoid valves or driers, the liquid line including the parts to be
replaced, must be pumped down to atmospheric pressure (0 bar g). This is done by closing the nearest
valve on the inlet side to the part in question. Then the compressor has to be run in manual control
mode until the LP cuts out. Restart the compressor 2-3 times for proper pump down. It is also strongly
recommended to use the pump down unit, to avoid any blow outs of refrigerant.
8. Motors, pumps and fans must be checked frequently
Further, to avoid loss of refrigerant, the plant has to be frequently tested with leak detector so that
possible leakages can be discovered as early as possible.
Be especially observant at joints and valve connections. Keep a log, noting levels on a regular basis.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

9. Safety valve
The pressure vessels are secured with safety valves which are factory set to open at a given pressure.
See P& Id for details.
The safety valve is connected to a line leading to fresh air. This line is not Teknotherm delivery. A
flexible joint can be delivered on request, or as an option to connect to the ships overboard piping
system of safety valves.
-----------------------------------
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

START UP
1. Switch on the pilot current. Check power supply and fuses for control and starter panel.
The pilot current must be switched on minimum 12 hours before starting up, to ensure sufficient oil
temperature. If this is neglected, condensed refrigerant might be mixed in the compressor oil, resulting
in reduced lubrication effect with a possible break down as result.
2. All alarm is reset.
3. Make sure that isolating valves in the compressor system are open.
Do not close valves in system and liquid injection system during stand still periods. Only the supply lines
if necessary.
4. Check that all necessary shut of valves in the condenser water circulation system are open.
Make sure that the water are circulating and correct regulated.
5. Check that all shut off valves for the plants discharge system, and the shut off valves in the suction and
control pipe lines are open. Further shut of valves in the high pressure side of the system must be
open.
6. Open the compressor suction stop valve one turn.
7. Start the compressor and open the suction valve little by little to fully open.
Care has to be taken at this point to avoid any condensed gas (liquified refrigerant) in suction line to
enter the compressor and then causing liquid hammer.
8. After started up the compressor, increase the capacity gradually up to wanted point, or switch to
automatic operation.
NOTE! CHECK THE SUCTION PRESSURE DURING THE CAPACITY

INCREASE
9. Check that normal operating condition, such as pressure, temperature, oil level, current consumption,
etc. are established.
10. During operation of the plant, stop-valves have to be in full open position. This to avoid damage on
stem sealing of the compressor. The stop valves are equipped with "back seat" sealing.
11. After repairing or opening any components in the refrigerant system, all air must be removed with use
of a vacuum pump
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

The refrigeration machinery for the air-conditioning system is based on direct expansion of R-134a or R-407c.
The water chiller unit (s), is complete assembled with independent compressors, with built in motor, oil
separator, and necessary auxiliary equipment. The unit is dimensioned for X x X% of required capacity.
Reference is made to the technical specification.
The water chiller unit is intended to serve the chilled water system.
The water chiller units

The unit consists of compressor, condenser and an evaporator with necessary operating and safety devices:
- Capacity regulation 50-75 and 100% % .

- Internal el.wiring.
- Heating elements in el.motor and oil separator.
- Shut off valves for compressor suction and discharge, and safety valves.
The condensers and evaporator are equipped with safety valves. All the safety valves is to be connected to a
pipe line leading to fresh air.
The condenser
is of type Shell & Tube for cooling with fresh water. Made with copper finned tubes, rolled into the endplates,
which are of steel material.
The water heads is cast iron and corrosion plugs are mounted. Water flows inside the copper tubes, and
to the liquid drier/strainer to the expansion valves and to the evaporator. The condenser has capacity to
operate at 38º C Water, or 36º C sea water.
The evaporator
is of type shell and tube, for direct expansion of refrigerant. The evaporator is, on larger plants divided into
independent circuits. Each circuit has one electronic expansion valve, controlled by a Danfoss controller. This
controller reacts to signals given from the PLC. When a cooling demand is sensed by the temperature sensor in
the outgoing water line, the solenoid valve opens and the liquid passes through the expansion valve (s). A
pressure drop in the refrigerant allows the refrigerant to evaporate inside the copper tubes. The setting of
each circuit, and when it opens are controlled by the PLC.
Oil separator
Built in type, with fine oil filters, sight-glass and level switch.
The separator is a combined oil reservoir and separator. Draining of oil is done in the bottom where. To keep
up correct oil temperature, there is mounted a heating element with thermostat in the oil separator. The
heater is for stand still heating of the oil only. The heater is mounted in a thermo well, allowing the element to
be removed without need for draining of pressure in the system. It is important to follow the instructions in
the en
prior to start up.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

The Oil circuit.
The compressor needs oil for several purposes. Cooling of compressed gas, tightening, lubrication and
capacity control. Oil pressure is created by the differential pressure between the high and low pressure side
with built in pressure control.
Control system for AC-plant

The control system is based on a programmable logic controller (PLC, type Schneider) installed in the control
cabinet. In the cabinet the following equipment is installed:
- Display for settings, reading and alarms (front door)

- Terminal for operating the expansion valve controller (inside cabinet)
- Hour counter for compressor (inside cabinet)
- Ampere meter for compressor
- Alarm indication lamps for safety in the system.
The electronic expansion valves are controlled by Danfoss EKC evaporator controllers installed in the control
cabinet.
Start of the refrigeration machinery is based on the signal from the outlet water temperature (TT1) from the
chillers. The compressors can be set to start automatically in "AUTO" mode, or manually in "MANUAL" mode.
The water chiller evaporator has one - or multiple circuit coils - which are cycled out as the load decreases, by
closing of the expansion valves.
The compressors are controlled by the "chilled water OUT" temperature transmitter (TT1) and the suction
pressure (LP) transmitter (PT2) located on the suction side of the compressors. Each compressor is equipped
with a capacity control, which allows the compressors to operate in steps 50%-75% and 100% capacity to
achieve constant suction pressure. Some compressors may have stepless capacity regulation.
In refrigeration plants with multiple water chiller units interconnected, start/stop of compressors is controlled
by signals from "mixed temperature" transmitters (TT4) mounted in the common chilled water outlet pipe.
When the chilled water has reached the pre-set low temperature limit, and the cooling demand is reached,
the expansion valves controller closes the expansion valves in the liquid lines to the cooling (evaporator) coils.
The compressors will continue running until stopped at the low-pressure cut out (PT2) limit, ensuring that only
a minimum of refrigerant is trapped in the water chiller evaporator coils at no cooling demand ( -
). The refrigerant will at standstill be stored in the condensers / liquid receiver. If the units are not in
use, all liquid and main suction stop valves should be closed after pump down.
The system have built-in possibilities for changing leading and trailing compressors in order to equalise the
running hours for the compressors. In a system with multiple units, "trailing" and "leading" units can be
chosen by operator.
The compressors are secured by safety devices, controlling suction pressure, discharge pressure and oil
pressure.
The control/starter panel is ventilated. Filters must be cleaned on a regular base, and function of the electric
fan as well. Warm objects such as steam pipes, exhaust pipes etc, in the near by area must be insulated to
prevent heat from entering direct into the panel.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

A closer description of settings and functions of the PLC control system is in the instruction manual under.
Always keep a copy of the description and the electric wiring diagrams inside the electric panel compartment.
The refrigerant circuit
Refrigerant gas from the compressor passes through the oil separator where oil is removed. In the outgoing
line from the oil separator there is a stop valve, ensuring serviceability, preventing refrigerant from going back
to the separator. The gas moves to the condenser, where the gas converts to liquid stage, (high pressure). The
liquid goes via the filter driers to the evaporator
controlled by the electronic well proven Danfoss ETS expansion valves, ensuring dry suction gas to enter the
compressor. The water chiller is divided into circuits, allowing one circuit at the time to operate. all if
necessary. The circuits are fully divided from each other.
The filter driers secure clean and dry refrigerant. The filter media is changeable.
The first months of operating these dryin , removes moist if any in the refrigerant. After this they
may be replaced, with fresh ones working as strainers for particles and driers.
On the compressor a suction strainer is in some applications, mounted. This has a steel filter core. For
commissioning and first hours running, an extra filter cloth is mounted. This cloth is normally to be removed
by the commissioning engineer after finished commissioning.
Optional:
To prevent unnecessary pollution to the atmosphere, the units have connections and pipes connected to a
parts or the whole refrigerant charge. This unit must always be used, during service.
On the receiver of this unit there is a level glass that indicates the amount of refrigerant temporary stored in
the system.
The refrigerant circuit has safety valves. These should on a regular basis be serviced. The 3 way valves on the
condensers allows removing/replacement. All these valves must be connected to a common collector with no
valves and a service valve to drain water. The flexible hoses between the safety valves and the pipe system
should be checked on a routine basis.
Optional:
Gas Detectors:
The units are delivered often with gas detectors on each water chiller unit and one on the pump down unit. In
addition one sensor is to be located in the common collector to detect leakage. The sensors are energized by a
separate PLC panel, and will indicate/locate which detector is giving an alarm.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

MAINTENANCE
It cannot be too strongly emphasised that the regular and accurate logging of temperatures, pressure etc. is
vital for proper maintenance of the plant. It ensures that any variations from normal are noted without delay
and steps can then be taken to discover and, if necessary, rectify the cause.
In addition to regular logging, as mentioned above, there are certain routine observations and duties which
operators should make a habit of undertaking from time to time every day.
These include the following points:
1. The oil level in the oil-separator will modulate between the upper and lower part of the sight glass when
the compressor is running. When the compressor is stationary, oil level should be at the same location as
after commissioning.
If the level is not right it indicates either that there is a fault in the oil return arrangements or that the
compressor is loosing more oil than can be recovered by the oil recovery system. In either case the cause
should be investigated and rectified immediately.
2. All capped valves should have their caps firmly in position in order to prevent loss of refrigerant or the
entry of air and moisture.
3. New plants should be tested daily for refrigerant leaks the first week or two. After that the plant should
be tested weekly for leaks.
It is good practice to keep the whole plant thoroughly clean externally. The presence of oil at a joint may
well give early indication of a refrigerant leak, but unless the plant is kept clean this may pass unnoticed.
4. Pressure and temperature readings should be checked regularly (in addition to the routine logging) and
any variations from normal must be promptly investigated.
5. The water flow and pressure must be correctly regulated according to the specification during
commissioning, and on a regular basis to be controlled.
SUCTION STRAINER (Built in the compressor)
Providing the whole system is reasonably clean (after 1 year in operation) this strainer has sufficient area to
ensure effective filtration for a number of years running. The strainer element should be inspected and
cleaned when the compressor is overhauled. Before this and during the first year the filter should be cleaned
1-2 times.
The symptoms of such a condition are:

1. The suction gas pressure at the compressor will be below normal.
2. The delivery gas temperature will be above normal.
3. The ammeter reading will be below normal.
4. The conditions given in 1, 2 and 3 will not be improved by adjustments to the regulator or to the
refrigerant charge.
In the event of the symptoms indicating that the strainer is choked the compressor should be stopped and the
strainer cleaned.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

MAINTENANCE
MOISTURE IN THE SYSTEM
It is of the utmost importance that the refrigerating system is maintained in absolutely dry condition.
Refrigerants can only absorb small amounts of moisture, the exact amount being a function of the solubility of
water in the refrigerant and the temperature.
Moisture is one of the major problems in the refrigerating system. It can cause corrosion throughout the
system and will bring about deterioration of the oil forming gums, which may lead to seizure of moving parts.
If moisture is suspected, immediate steps should be take to eliminate it by means of the refrigerant drier.
GENERAL NOTES
1. It is essential that air, moisture and dirt should be prevented from entering the system. These three items
together with leakage of refrigerant, are the main causes of failure in refrigerating plants.
2. When removing any components for cleaning or replacement or any other reason, always thoroughly dry
and warm the article and surrounding parts. Scrupulous care should be taken to blank all open
connections as rapidly as possible.
3. Additional refrigerant is only required to replace any leakage from faulty joints etc. Before adding
refrigerant, find and repair the faulty joint causing the leak.
4. It is essential to evacuate the refrigerant to other parts of the plant or to a refrigerant vessel before
loosening any connection where refrigerant is confined. Good industrial practices should be used when
handling refrigerant and oil. There should be good ventilation of working areas and contact with the skin
and eyes should be avoided by the use of protective gloves and goggles. Any splashes in the eye(s) should
be removed by washing with plenty of water; splashes on the skin should be removed by washing with
soap and water.
Smoking should not be permitted when opening any part of the plant.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
A routine maintenance schedule is desirable with all mechanical equipment, but refrigeration plant is, in this
respect, in a somewhat different category since it is peculiarly suspectible to the presence of air and moisture
in the system. Consequently, it is undesirable to open up part or parts of a plant more than is absolutely
necessary to ensure efficient working.
With this in mind the following schedule has been prepared by gathering together points from various parts of
the instruction book to form the basis of a maintenance routine.
1. Daily
1.1 Check temperatures and pressures throughout the system.
2. Weekly
2.1 Test complete plant thoroughly for refrigerant leaks.
3. Monthly
3.1 Test automatic controls and safety devices to ensure that they operate at the correct pressures or
temperatures. This is particularly important in connection with high and low-pressure cut outs.
To test the HP cut out, check plc set point HP alarm. Or the water supply to the condenser should
be reduced or stopped and a note made of the condensing pressure at which the cut out trips.
Make sure that the water supply is fully restored after testing
4. Every third month

4.1 Examine condenser corrosion plugs (if sea water cooled) and replace if necessary.
Make sure new gaskets are available.
5. Yearly
5.1 Shut down plant and drain oil from compressor and separator. Clean oil filter and refill with the
correct charge of new (not reclaimed) oil of the same grade. Note that the oil is hydrofobic.
Opened cans will absorb moisture. Use only new oil from sealed containers. Use a condensing
unit to evacuate the gas prior to opening up.
5.2 Inspect condenser tubes. This inspection is to be carried out annually.

Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (continues)
6. Every second year or 20.000 hours operation

The following recommendation is made for a biennial inspection.
6.1 All refrigerant and liquid pipes, vessels, coil terminals in condensers and evaporators. Shells of
condenser, heat exchangers and other pressure parts of the equipment to be examined externally
as far as is practicable.
7. Every fifth year or 35- 40.000 hours operation

7.1 Compressor is to be completely overhauled or replaced.
8. At any time
Symptoms indicating choking of compressor suction strainers, fine oil filters, oil filters and the
fouling of tubes in water cooled heat exchange vessels should be given immediate attention.
8.1 Compressors suction strainer.
8.2 Condensers.
8.3 Evaporators.
All above mentioned procedures are to be done by competent engineer. Teknotherm service team is always in
stand by to carry out maintenance and service work.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

MAINTENANCE
ADDING REFRIGERANT
Refrigerant charges into the liquid line.
1. Weigh a refrigerant service drum with charge.
2. Keep compressor in normal operation with discharge, and suction stop valves open.
3. Connect refrigerant charging drum to the charging valve, which usually is placed with the drum valve
between liquid valve and drier. Charging drum is placed with the drum valve turned down (so that
liquid can be added).
4. Purge charging connection with refrigerant before tightening.
5. Close the liquid valve before the charging valve.
6. Open charging valve and valve on refrigerant drum so that refrigerant can flow into the system.
Check the liquid level in the level glass on the condenser or the liquid receiver.
7. If the plant is equipped with a drier, this must be used during charging.
8. Refrigerant drum is again weighed, and quantity of refrigerant added will be difference of weight.
9. After having added refrigerant to the system, the quantity of oil must be checked and if necessary oil
added.
GENERAL
1. Check lubrication of compressor frequently.

2. Prevent air and moisture to enter the system.
3. Operate with normal discharge pressure.
4. Avoid liquid slugging.
5. Keep discharge temperature below 80°C
6. Check refrigerant charge and the automatic controls.
7. Check the safety controls periodically.
8. Test the plant periodically with a leak detector.
9. Clean the tubes in the condenser and oil cooler.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SEEKING FOR DEFECTS
The following form for defect seeking is made in order to find the most common kinds of defects
easier, its reason and how to repair the defect. This form is not perfect and cannot replace good
experience and knowledge about the compressor, but hopefully it will be to some help.
By examination of a refrigerating machinery and its system, you have to concentrate on some parts:
1. The temperature signals from the AC-central/controller

2. The evaporating pressure (Low Pressure)
3. The condensing pressure (High Pressure)
4. Compressor load capacity
5. The operating time of the compressor
6. Sounds from compressor, motor, expansion valves etc.
7. Smell.
SYSTEM POSSIBLE REASON ATTEMPT FOR REPAIRING

The motor will not operate 1. Current supply is missing. Check the supply of electricity.
2. Fuses failure. Change to new fuses.
3. Burnt contacts in the disconnecting Clean the contact planes and if necessary
switch or contactor. change the contact sets.
4. Overload relay released. Reset the overload release and find the
reason for it.
5. Low voltage. To be kept within +-10% of the normal
voltage.
The compressor does not 1. Defect pilot current organ. Thermostat, Repair or change the defect part. Check
start. pressure transmitters for alarms
for high-, low- and oil pressure.
2. The system has lost the refrigerant Find the leak and repair.
charge and low pressure alarm Charge correct amount of refrigerant.
3. High pressure alarm. Find the reason, reset the alarm, and
control the regulating.
4. Common alarm. Find the reason, reset the alarm and
control the regulating. Check oil level.
5. Burnt pilot current coil in contactor. Change to new coil.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SEEKING FOR DEFECTS
SYSTEM POSSIBLE REASON ATTEMPT FOR REPAIRING

High suction pressure 1. The expansion valve too open. Examine the expansion valves, examine the
regulator settings
2. The compressor to small compared The compressor's revolution to be increased
to the cooling element or to the load. if it operates with reduced rev.
Low suction pressure 1. Choked liquid line, expansion Pump down the system, examine and clean
valve, or filters. the expansion valves and filters.
2. The capacity regulation does not Check for burned coils or stuck valves,
work
3. Too small charging of refrigerant. Find the leak and repair.
Charge correct amount new refrigerant.
High condensing 1 Too much refrigerant in the Drain some refrigerant from the system.
pressure system, so that the condenser
partly is full with liquid.
2. Air in the system. Purge the plant. Use recovery unit
3. Too little or too warm cooling water More or colder water to the condenser.
to the condenser.
4. Overgrow condenser and deposition Clean the condenser tubes and tube system,
on the waterside. valves and water pump.
Low condensing 1. Too much or too cold water or air Throttle the water or the air amount.
pressure through the condenser. Examine the water regulating valve.
The suction line is frosting 1. The refrigerant follows the suction line Examine the expansion valve, examine the
and the dis-charge line is to the compressor sensors and the valve's reg. ability. Contact
just lukewarm service engineer.
The suction line dry and 1. Too little refrigerant. Find the leak and repair.
moderate warm, discharge Charge correct amount new refrigerant.
line very warm
Low oil level, dirty oil, 1. Filter on the suction side overgrown. 1.Clean the filters, check diff. pressure.
overcharge of oil 2. To low oil charge. 2.Check the oil sep. function, increase
3. To high oil charge capacity to run back oil.
3. To much oil added/ refrigerant mixed in
oil
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
DANGER!
Indicates a hazardous situation in which failure to observe all safety precautions will lead to death or serious
injury and major damage to the refrigerating plant.
CAUTION!
Indicates a hazardous situation in which failure to observe all safety precautions will lead to death or serious
injury and major damage to the refrigerating plant.
IMPORTANT!
Indicates that the refrigerating unit may be damaged or the life of the system shortened if the instructions given
are not followed precisely.
The safety and precautionary warning contained in this manual establishes the minimum level of safety
required to perform maintenance work on the refrigerating unit. System operators and maintenance personnel
are advised to implement at their own responsibility any further safety activities in line with particular
environment or location of the refrigerating plant.
WARNING!
Should this plant be operated carelessly and in disregard of the instruction given in this manual, death or
serious injury may result.
This manual must therefore be kept in a convenient easily accessible location near the plant and should be
studied periodically by those working with plant.
Maintenance work on this plant should only be undertaken by Teknotherm qualified service personnel, with
thorough understanding of the instructions given in this manual.
Prior to commencing any inspection of maintenance work on the compressor, read the safety warnings at the
beginning of the refrigerating plant manual.
If this manual is lost or damaged, a replacement should be obtained immediately from Teknotherm.
If ownership of the refrigerating plant passes to another party, this instruction manual should always
accompany the plant.
Teknotherm reserves the right to make changes or improvements to its products without notice. It is therefore
possible that some explanations given in this manual may not apply a particular plant.
If any uncertainty exists on the part of the plant operator, contact Teknotherm.
Any questions regarding this manual or the refrigerating plant should be addressed to Teknotherm.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
CAUTION!
Residual oil from compressor unit should be cached in an oil pan in order not to contaminate the environment
and be handled according to the local rules for treatment of waste oil.
Draining of oil and refrigerant should be done by trained personnel and should be executed with greatest care.
It is recommendable to use a gas mask and rubber gloves and to avoid any contact between skin and
refrigerant.
During the draining the machine room should be sufficiently ventilated. Smoking during oil and refrigerant
draining is prohibited, as well as every present of open fire.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
This information is prepared to protect engineers, system operators and maintenance personnel of Teknotherm
refrigerating systems and to assure effective utilisation of the unit. The installation of the unit on board is to be
done by qualified service personnel following the procedures mentioned in the installation manual including
preparations and checking to be done before commissioning, and at final commissioning.
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
The operator can start, operate in manual/automatic mode, and stop the unit after receipt of necessary
instructions from the Teknotherm representative.
During operation it is recommendable to make regular registration of the operation conditions of the
compressor unit by means of logbooks. In case that alarm occurs on the unit, the operator should immediately
check which alarm message is displayed on the panel and confirm the instruction manual from Teknotherm. In
case of emergency trip, the compressor unit will automatically be stopped by the control system. The operator
must immediately check whether there is any abnormal situation present on the unit such as gas leakage, oil
leakage, compressor, valves, piping, instruments, etc. Trace the cause of the trip from the control panel and
compare the instruction manual, eventually contact Teknotherm for necessary instructions of intervention from
Teknotherm to rect
Short period of standstill

The oil heater and motor heater power must be kept on during standstill in order to maintain the oil (tank)
warm enough for the next start-up. The cooling water/glycol must be kept flowing during standstill to prevent
freezing of water/glycol.
Long term shut down for overhaul

The power source for motors must be cut-off. The oil heater power must also be switched off. Control panel
must be kept power on. The refrigerant must be pumped down to the condenser. All the stop valves related to
the system must be closed (such as suction shut off valve, liquid shut off valve, etc). The cooling water/glycol
supply must be stopped. The cooling water supply must not be stopped immediately after stop of the
compressor and the water/glycol pump must run for a while to prevent freezing of the cooling water.
Important:
For start up/stop and operation of the unit please study the Teknotherm instruction manual for the
refrigeration plant.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
EAR PROTECTION
As the noise level of the compressor and motor is higher than 60dBa, it is necessary to wear ear-protections
when the unit is in operation. This is indicated on the compressor unit by an ear protection pictogram.
BREATHING APPARATUS
Self-contained breathing apparatus must be available and be used in case of gas leakage. This is shown on the
unit by a breathing apparatus
da
SKIN PROTECTION
Protective clothing should be worn if there is possibility of direct contact with refrigerant or oil.
This is indicated on the compressor unit by a skin protection pictogram.
HAND PROTECTION
Protective gloves must be used if there is a risk of direct contact with refrigerant. Use leather gloves or other
protective gloves insulated against the cold.
This is indicated on the compressor unit by a hand protection pictogram.
EYE PROTECTION
Wear eye protection when working with the plant.
This is indicated on the compressor unit by an eye protection pictogram.
HOT SURFACES
Necessary protection must be worn against high surface temperature, which can be present on the high-
pressure gas side and on the oil circu
separator of the unit. Burns must be treated by a physician.
COLD SURFACES
Necessary protection must be worn against low surface temperatures, which can be present on the low-
pressure g
line of the unit. In case of frostbite, thaw frosted parts with water. Do not attempt to remove clothing that has
been stuck to the skin. Burns must be treated by a physician.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
POWER SUPPLY
Protection against electrical power is required for all unit components under power such as motors, panels, oil
heater, solenoid valves, temperature sensors, etc. Any service work on the electrical components is only
al -
AUTOMATIC START
Special care is to be taken for automatic starting of compressor when operating in automatic mode. The
corresponding pictogram is fitted on the control cabinet.
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGES
Warning, any skin and eye contact with refrigerant may cause frost-bite. Inhalation of the refrigerant may
develop anaesthesia, may disturb the respiration, heart and nervous system.
Necessary protection when handling refrigerant leakages:
- Exposure control: Vapours are heavier than air and may cause asphyxiation by reducing oxygen available
for breathing. Wear gas mask and self-contained breathing apparatus if leakage is extensive.
- Eye protection: Wear eye protection when handling the leakages.
- Hand protection: Protective gloves must be used when handling the leakages. Use leather gloves or other
protective gloves insulated against the cold.
- Skin protection: Protective clothing must be worn when handling the leakages.
-
-134a.
OIL LEAKAGES
Wear necessary protection when handling oil leakages such as protective gloves, shoes, clothing and eye
glasses. If oil is exposed to extensive heat, use gas mask and self-contained breathing apparatus.
High risk of slipping due to leakage/spillage of oil.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
MAINTENANCE WORK
Maintenance work should only be done by Teknotherm qualified service personnel. Before commencing
disassembly and re-assembly service works on the unit, read carefully and understand the contents of the
instruction manual, which explains the structure of and the work methods appropriate for the concerned
screw/piston compressor plants. If any service work is performed which disregards the instructions given in the
manual, there is a risk of accident. Most accidents and problems encountered during operation are a result of
negligence in basic safety precautions, insufficient understanding of and failure to observe proper operation
principles and procedures and failure to implement appropriate inspection and maintenance procedures and
precautions.
PROTECTION MEASURES
GENERAL
For protection of persons and goods against danger it is necessary to foresee efficient protection means on an
easy accessible place. Following stipulations should be taken into account, independent from the already
prescribed measures by the local authorities.
FIRE EXTINGUISHING
Portable fire extinguisher should be sufficiently present in each machine room. When choosing the
extinguishing medium, necessary account must be taken with the refrigerant as dangerous chemical reaction
can occur between certain extinguishing media and certain refrigerants.
PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
Safety clothing, gloves, protective glasses and efficient breath protection means must be present in sufficient
numbers. The breath protection must be suitable for the refrigerant used. The safety equipment must be
protected against unauthorized use, and be preserved in a dedicated cabinet close to the entry of concerned
prescriptions.
FIRST AID
Bandages, medicines and special chemicals related to the refrigerant must be present and be preserved in a
dedicated cabinet outside the machine room, in the immediate nearness of the entry of the machine room.
Special attention must be given regarding urgent treatment of eye-injuries!
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1. 1 TYPE OF PRODUCTS
This manual refers to the Teknotherm series of water chiller units. Typical for and air condition applications.
Compressors, fresh and seawater cooled condensers.
1.12 COMPRESSORS
The compressors used are well known reliable compressors, suitable for heavy duty marine services.
They are fitted into a system building, a functional and optimized application.
For further information please read the instruction manuals following this product.
1.13 CONDENSERS
The units has shell and tube condensers, for both fresh and sea water. These vessels are designed and delivered
Normal applications are LRS (Lloyds ), Det norske Veritas (DnV), GL, BV, NK, CE, Special offshore classes, and
others
1.2. COMPATIBLE FLUIDS

REFRIGERANT SIDE
The Teknotherm condensing unit series has been designed for use with HCFC and HFC refrigerants. The allowed
fluids belong to group 2 as per art. 9 of EC Directive 97/23.
WATER SIDE
The fluid used is generally water, in a closed circuit. The application may feature the use of water with the
addition of antifreeze fluid, for example ethylene or propylene glycol; these antifreeze mixtures are commonly
called "brine".
1.3. COMPONENTS AND PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Each compressor unit is identified by a reference number, that is shown on the metal rating plate fitted on the
unit. Always refer to this number in all communications to Teknotherm regarding the unit purchased, in order
to ensure correct and prompt product identification.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 RECEIPT AND INSPECTION OF THE PRODUCT

Check that the compressor unit corresponds to the type ordered. To do this, cross check the order confirmation,
the delivery note and the ratings of the compressor unit. Check that all components have been delivered and
that they have not been damaged during transport. In event of damage to the units or missing components, a
written claim must be sent to the carrier.
2.2 STORING THE PRODUCT

Before installation, the evaporator must be stored in a dry, sheltered place, at temperatures not lower that
+5°C. Avoid sites where condensate may form inside the condenser, due to temperature variations during the
day (for example exposure to sunlight.).
2.3 POSITIONING THE UNIT

The units can be handled using the lifting lugs located on the unit. The unit must be installed horizontally, and
fastened to supports, brackets or longitudinal members. Non-horizontal installation may considerably affect
performance. The unit must be positioned in such a way as to allow any inspection, maintenance and
replacement operations to be carried out comfortably.
2.4 LIFTING
Lift the units using the lifting lugs only, if not otherwise stated in a separate lifting instruction.
Check the eyebolts/lugs before lifting. Damaged lugs must not be used. Lifting eyebolts must be tightened
before lifting, if needed the position must be adjusted. Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the
sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lugs. Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment and cables
attached to the unit.
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
APPENDIX 1 - SAFETY DATA SHEET REFRIGERANT R-407c

Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
APPENDIX 2 - SAFETY DATA SHEET REFRIGERANT R-134a

Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
APPENDIX 3 - SAFETY DATA SHEET - COMPRESSOR OIL TRITON SE 170

Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Document no.
TEKNO014.DOC/TRE

SAFETY
Page 1 of 5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
The control system is based on EKC316A expansion valve controllers from Danfoss, installed in
the control cabinet. One controller for each circuit in the chiller unit(s). Settings and viewing of
various parameters is done through the integrated display on each controller.
DETAILS ON EKC 316A IN DANFOSS MANUAL
Sequence for enabling the expansion valves:
A signal consisting of temperature demand together with running signal from compressor
enables the controller for the expansion valve in the circuit related to compressor and chiller.
There is one controller for each circuit.
Settings:
Function Parameter Initial setting User setting
Normal display
Shows the actual superheat/ valve's opening degree/temperature
Define view in o17
button a brief push (1s). Define view in o17

Reference
Set the required set point for the thermostat * -5
Differential r01* 1
Units (0=°C+bar /1=°F+psig) r05 0
External contribution to the reference r06 0
Correction of signal from S2 r09 0
Correction of signal from S3 r10 0
Start / stop of refrigeration r12 On
Define thermostat function r14 0
(0= no thermostat function, 1=On/off thermostat)
Page 2 of 5
Alarm
Upper deviation (above the temperature setting) A01* 20.0
Lower deviation (below the temperature setting) A02* 10.0
A03* 30
Battery monitoring A34 OFF
Regulating parameters
P: Amplification factor Kp n04 0.7
I: Integration time Tn n05 120
D: Differentiation time Td (0 = off ) n06 OFF
Max. value of superheat reference n09 10
Min. value of superheat reference n10 4
MOP n11 5.0
n15 0
n17 0
Stability factor for superheat control. n18 5
Changes should only be made by trained staff
Damping of amplification around reference value n19 0.3
Amplification factor for superheat n20 0.4
Definition of superheat control n21 1
1=MSS, 2=LOADAP
Value of min. superheat reference for loads under 10% n22 2
Max. opening degree n32 100
only be changed through the use of another valve.

Number of steps from 0-100% opening degree (x10) n37** 353
263 for ETS50 or 353 for ETS100
Number of steps per second n38 250
200-300 for ETS
n39 50
Compensation of spindle play in the control range n40 100
Valve status when power supply interrupted: n41 1
1 = NC, 2 = NO (special application)
Compensation of spindle play at the closing point must take place: n42 1
1=when the valve opens, 2=when the valve closes
Attenuation factor for inner loop n43 0.4
Integration time for inner loop (TnT0) n44 30.0
Safety value for lower temperature difference for inner loop n45 3.0
Miscellaneous
o03***
ON/OFF switch (service-pin message) o04***
Define input signal on the analoge input AIA: o10 0
0: no signal,
1: Temperature setpoint. 0-20 mA
2: Temperature setpoint. 4-20 mA
3: Displacement of superheat reference. 0-20 mA
4: Displacement of superheat reference. 4-20 mA
Set supply voltage frequency o12 60
o17 1
1: Superheat
3: Air temperature
Manual control of outputs: o18 OFF
OFF: no manual control
1: Relay for solenoid valve: select ON
2: Relay for solenoid valve: select OFF
3: Alarm relay activated (cut out)
At settings 1-
Page 3 of 5
Working range for pressure transmitter min. value o20 -1

Working range for pressure transmitter max. value o21 12
Refrigerant setting o30 20

1=R12. 2=R22. 3=R134a. 4=R502. 5=R717. 6=R13.
7=R13b1. 8=R23. 9=R500. 10=R503. 11=R114.
12=R142b. 13=User defined. 14=R32. 15=R227.
16=R401A. 17=R507. 18=R402A. 19=R404A. 20=R407C.
21=R407A. 22=R407B. 23=R410A. 24=R170. 25=R290.
26=R600. 27=R600a. 28=R744. 29=R1270.
Manual contr o45 0
Selection of control mode: o56 1

1 = Normal
2 = With inner loop (T0)
3 = With inner loop (S media temperature less T0)
Service
Analog input AIA (16-17) u06 mA
Read status of input DI u10 on/off
Thermostat cut-in time u18 min.
Temperature at S2 sensor u20 °C
Superheat u21 K
Superheat reference u22 K
u24 %
Read evaporating pressure u25 bar
Read evaporating temperature u26 °C
Temperature at S3 sensor u27 °C
Temperature reference u28 °C
Read signal at pressure transmitter input u29 mA
*) Used only when thermostat function (r14 = 1) is selected.

**) The display on the controller can display 3 digits only, but the setting value has 4 digits. Only the 3 most important will be
shown. It means f.ex. . 250 will give a setting of 2500.
***) This setting will only be possible if a data communication module has been installed in the controller.
Page 4 of 5
OPERATION
Display
The values will be shown with three digits, and with a setting you can determine whether the
temperature are to be shown in °C or in °F. (Pressure in bar or psig.)
Light-emitting diodes (LED) on front panel

when the belonging relay is activated.
The uppermost LED will indicate when the valve is moving towards a greater opening degree.
The next LED will indicate when the valve is moving towards a smaller opening degree.
The third one will indicate when the thermostat demands refrigeration.
All light-emitting diodes will flash when there is an error in the regulation.
In this situation you can upload the error code on the display and cancel the alarm by giving
the uppermost button a brief push.
The buttons
When you want to change a setting, the two buttons will give you a higher or lower value
depending on the button you are pushing. But before you change the value, you must have
access to the
menu. You obtain this by pushing the upper button for a couple of seconds - you will then
enter the column with parameter codes. Find the parameter code you want to change and
push the two buttons simultaneously. When you have changed the value, save the new value
by once more pushing the two buttons simultaneously.
Gives access to the menu (or cutout an alarm)
Gives access to changes
Saves a change
Examples of operations
Set set-point for the thermostat
1. Push the two buttons simultaneously
2. Push one of the buttons and select the new value
3. Push both buttons again to conclude the setting
Set one of the other menus
1. Push the upper button until a parameter is shown
2. Push one of the buttons and fi nd the parameter you want to change
3. Push both buttons simultaneously until the parameter value is shown
4. Push one of the buttons and select the new value
5. Push both buttons again to conclude the setting
Page 5 of 5
Factory setting
If you need to return to the factory-set values, it can be done in this way:
- Cut out the supply voltage to the controller
- Keep both buttons depressed at the same time as you reconnect the supply voltage
Start of controller
When the electric wires have been connected to the controller, the following points have to be
attended to before the regulation starts:
1. Switch off the external ON/OFF switch that starts and stops the regulation.
2. Follow the menu survey and set the various parameters to the required values.
3. Switch on the external switch, and regulation will start.
4. Follow the actual room temperature or superheat on the display.
If the superheating fluctuates

-set
control parameters should in most cases provide a stable and relatively fast regulating system.
If the system however fluctuates this may be due to the fact that too low superheat
parameters have been selected:
If adaptive superheat has been selected:
Adjust: n09, n10 and n18.
If load-defined superheat has been selected:
Adjust: n09, n10 and n22.
Alternatively it may be due to the fact that the set regulation parameters are not optimal.
If the time of oscillation is longer than the integration time:
(Tp > Tn , (Tn is, say, 240 seconds))
1. Increase Tn to 1.2 times Tp
2. Wait until the system is in balance again
3. If there is still oscillation, reduce Kp by, say, 20%
4. Wait until the system is in balance
5. If it continues to oscillate, repeat 3 and 4
If the time of oscillation is shorter than the integration time:
(Tp < Tn , (Tn is, say, 240 seconds))
1. Reduce Kp by, say, 20% of the scale reading
2. Wait until the system is in balance
3. If it continues to oscillate, repeat 1 and 2.
Check that the solenoid valve in front of ETS valve closes when the
supply voltage to the controller is interrupted
Document no.
Setpoint List Standard WC
Teknotherm refrigerating machinery Version 3.1

www.teknotherm.com Version 3.8 16072010 1 of 4
Setpoint List - Teknotherm Water Chiller Control System
Setpoint List For Air Condition Control System
Teknotherm Reference Code:

Setpoint List Standard WC Version 3.8
Preface
This setpoint list is made for the Teknotherm Water Chiller Control System. The list is divided
into sections, one section for compressor or chiller. For each setpoint three values are
listed; the lowest allowed setpoint value, the highest allowed setpoint value and the default
setpoint value. The default setpoint value is the setpoint value that was set in the control
system be
air condition plant. Depending of how the control system is configured some setpoints may
be superfluous. These setpoints are labeled N/A and will not be shown in the control
It may be necessary to adjust the setpoints during the first startup of the air condition plant
or later during operation of the plant.
If a setpoint is set to an unfortunate value the control system may control poorly and the
lifetime of equipment is reduced. An unfortunate alarm limit may cause damage to
equipment and even injury or death to humans and other organisms. Setpoints and alarm
limits should not be adjusted by unqualified staff.
Please refer the user manual for how to adjust setpoints and how to operate the water
chiller plant.
1
Document no.

Chiller
Configuration Lower Upper Default User Unit
Limit Limit Value Setting
Diff pressure setpoints
HIGH DIFF. PRESSURE 0.10 1.60 0.40 Bar
LOW DIFF. PRESSURE 0.10 1.60 0.10 Bar
Regulation temperature
REGULATION TEMPERATURE -5.0 20.0 -0.5 ºC
NEUTRAL ZONE 0.0 10.0 0.2 ºC
TEMPERATURE INLET LOAD LIMITER -5.0 30.0 1.0
Alarms
LOW WATER TEMP. OUTLET -8.0 20.0 -3.0 ºC
Hotgas
ACTIVE TEMP -7.0 30.0 -1.2 ºC
TEMP HYSTERESIS 0.0 10.0 0.1 ºC
ACTIVE PRESSURE 0.00 6.00 2.00 Bar
PRESSURE HYSTERESIS 0.00 3.00 0.50 Bar
2
Document no.

Compressor 1
Lower Upper Default User Unit

Limit Limit Value Setting
Alarm Configuration
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 10.0 22.0 21.0 Bar
HIGH DISCHARGE TEMP 40 120 110 ºC
LOW DISCHARGE TEMP 0 90 40 ºC
SUCTION PRESSURE -0.20 5.00 1.00 Bar
START DELAY SUCTION PRESSURE 0 90 45 Sec
START DELAY OIL FLOW 0 20 8 Sec
STOP DELAY OIL FLOW 0 20 5 Sec
INTERLOCK DELAY CONDENCER 0 20 5 Sec
STOP DELAY CONTACTOR FAILURE 3 8 5 Sec
Running configuration
PUMPDOWN STOP 0 9.00 2.00 Bar
OPEN PRESSURE EXP. VALVE 0 8.00 4.00 Bar
RESTART DELAY STOP/START 180 600 300 Sec
RESTART DELAY START/START 300 1200 900 Sec
Load limiters
MAX CURRENT 0 250 100 A
MAX DISCHARGE PRESSURE 10.0 22.0 18.0 Bar
MIN SUCTION PRESSURE 0.00 9.00 3.20 Bar
LOAD LIMITER DELAY 0 60 30 Sec
LOAD INTERVAL 0 90 60 Sec
UNLOAD INTERVAL 0 90 10 Sec
Cap Reg load/unload time
MIN LOAD TIME PULSE 500 1000 700 ms
MAX LOAD TIME PULSE 500 1000 800 ms
MIN UNLOAD TIME PULSE 500 1000 400 ms
MAX UNLOAD TIME PULSE 500 1000 500 ms
3
Document no.

4
Page 1 of 20
STANDARDWC-BESKRIVELSE.doc
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Index
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR WATER CHILLER ........................................................................... 1
DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTROL TERMINAL ....................................................................... 2
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR CONTROL ........................................................................ 3
DESCRIPTION OF WATER CHILLER STATUS ........................................................................ 4
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR STATUS ........................................................................... 4
DESCRIPTION OF SET POINTS ............................................................................................... 5
DESCRIPTION OF THE ALARMS ........................................................................................... 10
MODBUS REGISTERMAPPING .............................................................................................. 12
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR WATER CHILLER
The control system is based on one programmable logic controller (PLC, type
Telemecanique M340) installed in a control cabinet. In the cabinet door there is a
touchscreen, an e-stop pushbutton and a reset push button with alarm lamp.
Pushbutton reset alarm:

For resetting alarms.
Indication lamp alarm:

Fixed light when active alarms.
Emergency STOP:
Stops the whole unit in case of an emergency situation.
Hour counter:
Mounted inside panel. Displays the number of hours the compressor have been running
Page 2 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTROL TERMINAL
The control terminal is used for these basic functions:
Read operating status including start and stop the compressor

Enter setpoints
Read alarms
For Configuration of the Unit, alarm
logs, Administrative settings and
Display configuration.
Set points for regulation, hotgas,

differential pressure, status screens and
local start/stop of chiller pump
For running compressor, configuration

of set points and status screens
Indication of chiller unit status:

Shows the inlet and outlet temperature. Differential pressure, indication of flow through
the water chiller, status of chiller water pump and status of expansion valve.
Pressing the water chiller symbol changes panel to show setpoints.
Indication of alarms:
Visible while active alarms
Pressing access the alarm page showing the different alarms
Indication of compressor status:

Showing the different status as stop, running, standby and alarm.
Pressing the compressor symbol changes the panel to show compressor status,
setpoints and alarms.
Compressor control:
Pressing control changes the panel to show compressor control with status and
start/stop.
Menu:
Pressing the menu button in the upper right corner changes the panel to select active
alarm page, historic alarm page and the system menu. Through the system menu it is
possible to calibrate touch and contrast and configuration of the chiller unit.
Page 3 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR CONTROL
You can start and stop the compressors:
Start:
Before start the following has to be fulfilled:
- All alarms reset and in normal condition
- Water chiller pump must be in running
- Restart delay fulfilled
The start and run sequence for the compressor:

When pressing the start button the compressor status changes to standby. The
water chiller pump will start automatically. After 30 s the compressor will start.
When pressing stop the expansion valve will close and the system will pump
down.
If the compressor has been stopped manually or by alarm in the system, it must
be started manually again.
Stop:
Activates the following stop sequences:

- Pumps down the system and stops the compressor
- Blocking start-sequence while restart delay.
Pressing stop for 3 seconds stops the compressor at once, without pumping
down.
Page 4 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF CHILLER PUMP CONTROL
You can start and stop the chiller pump:
Start in local mode:

Before start the following has to be fulfilled:
- Overload breaker signal from chiller pump cannot be tripped.
The start and run sequence for the chiller pump:

When the compressor is stopped status or alarm the chiller pump can start
manually by pressing the start button. The chiller pump will start automatically if
the compressor is in standby standby. 30 s after the pump is started the
compressor will start.
Stop in local mode:

By pressing the stop button the chiller pump will stop, also the compressor if
running.
Start in remote mode:

When start signal is received the chiller pump will start, It will also put the
compressor in standby status and will start 30s after the pump. As long there is
no active alarms in the system.
Stop in remote mode:

When stop signal is received the chiller pump will stop after 5 minutes. Also the
compressor will have a 5 minutes delay if it`s in running.
Page 5 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF WATER CHILLER STATUS
You can read following status values:

TEMPERATURE OUTLET
- Shows the actual temperature on outlet sensor of the waterchiller.
TEMPERATURE INLET
Shows the actual temperature on inlet sensor of the waterchiller
FLOW STATUS
- Shows the Different states of flow (Low flow, Flow or High Flow).
DIFFERENCE PRESSURE WATERCHILLER

- Shows the actual pressure difference between inlet and outlet of the water chiller.
Page 6 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF HOTGAS SETTINGS
WATER CHILLER-HOTGAS SETTINGS
HOTGAS OUTLET TEMPERATURE *.** °C

When temperature is below this set point the Hot gas solenoid will open
TEMP.HYSTERESIS *.** °C
When Temperature reaches Set point temperature plus this hysteresis the hot gas
solenoid will shut down.
HOTGAS SUCTION PRESSURE *.** Bar

When the pressure is below this set point the Hot gas solenoid will open
PRESSURE HYSTERESIS *.** Bar

When pressure reaches Set point temperature plus this hysteresis the hot gas solenoid
will shut down
.
Both set points have to be acquired before hot gas is activated.
When hot gas is activated the compressor will not be able to load the capacity.
Page 7 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE WC SETTINGS
HIGH DIFF. PRESSURE WARNING :
This is the highest differential pressure allowed trough the waterchiller.

If pressure is higher than set point this will stop the compressor ,it will also give alarm
even if compressor is not running.
LOW DIFF. PRESSURE WARNING:
This is the lowest differential pressure allowed trough the water chiller before start or
while running the compressors.
This set point will stop the compressor if running. And give no flow alarm.
Compressor is not allowed to start/run without flow.
If pumps stop while compressor running the compressor will stop after 20 seconds of
no flow.
Page 8 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF WATERCHILLER MENU
Set points for Alarms, Regulation, Hotgas and

Diff.pressure.
Water chiller status screen.
Starting and stopping CW pump.
REGULATION TEMPERATURE
REGULATION TEMP *.**°C

This is the temperature the compressors try to achieve.
NEUTRALZONE. *.**°C
This is a neutralzone around the regulation set point. Within this zone the compressors
will not load or unload. Se figure 1
TEMPERATURE INLET LOAD LIMITER *.**°C

If the temperature inlet is below this setpoint the compressor will not be able to load.
Page 9 of 20
REGULATION
Figure 1
WCALARMS
ALARM OUTLET LOW WATER TEMP *.**°C

Below this temperature the compressors will stop and give alarm.
Page 10 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR MENU
1.The Running Controls for the Compressor
2.Set points for the compressor.
3.status screen for the compressor.
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR SETTINGS MENU

Page 11 of 20
Running set points
RUNNING CONFIGURATION
PUMPDOWN STOP PRESSURE *.**Bar
Compressor stops on this pressure in suction line while pumping down
OPEN PRESSURE EXPANSION VALVES *.**Bar

The pressure in suction line must below this setting once after start to be able to open.
RESTART DELAY STOP/START ***s

Within this delay the compressors will not restart.
RESTART DELAY START/START ***s

Within this delay the compressors will not restart.
Page 12 of 20
Alarm set points
ALARM CONFIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE **.*Bar
Highest permissible pressure in discharge line.
HIGH DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE ***°C

Highest permissible temperature in discharge line.
LOW DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE ***°C

Lowest permissible temperature in discharge line.
SUCTION PRESSURE **.**Bar

Lowest permissible pressure in suction line.
START DELAY SUCTION PRESSURE ***s

Within this delay the alarm will not be set
Page 13 of 20
INTERLOCK DELAY CONDENSER ***s

STOP DELAY CONTACTOR FAILURE ***s

Page 14 of 20
START DELAY OIL FLOW ***s

STOP DELAY OIL FLOW SWITCH ***s

Within this delay the alarm will not be set.
Page 15 of 20
CAP.REG CONFIGURATION
LOAD INTERVAL ***s

This delays loading of compressor. The temperature has to be higher than reg. setpoint
+ ½ neutralzone and is then delayed before loading.
UNLOAD INTERVAL ***s

This delays unloading of compressor. The temperature has to be lower than reg.
setpoint - ½ neutralzone and is then delayed before unloading.
.
Page 16 of 20
Load limiters set points
LOAD LIMITS
MAX CURRENT ***A

This is the max current allowed, if setpoint is reached the compressor will unload
MAX DISCHARGE PRESSURE **.* Bar

This is the max discharge pressure allowed, if setpoint is reached the compressor will unload
MIN SUCTION PRESSURE **.**Bar

This is the min suction pressure allowed, if the setpoint is reached the compressor will unload
MIN OUTLET TEMP **.*°C

This is the Min Outlet temperature allowed, if the setpoint is reached the compressor will unload
LOAD LIMIT DELAY ***s

This is the delay between each time the load limiter is active.
Page 17 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF COMPRESSOR STATUS
You can read following status values on this page:

DISCHARGE PRESSURE - Shows actual discharge pressure.
SUCTION PRESSURE - Shows actual suction pressure.
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE - Shows actual discharge temperature
CURRENT - Shows actual current consumption
The next button will show you the rest of the status for the compressor.
You can read following status values on this page:

ALARMS - Shows Alarm status.
INTERLOCK CONDENSER
PRESENT - Shows Interlock condenser status.
PMS - Shows Power management status.
TIME DELAY START-START - Shows remaining restart delay in seconds
TIME DELAY STOP-START - Shows remaining restart delay in seconds
HOTGAS ACTIVE - Shows Hot gas status.
Page 18 of 20
DESCRIPTION OF THE ALARMS
Alarms are written to the alarm-screen when they arrive. Alarms also deenergize the
alarm relay and activate a red light in the reset pushbutton.
Alarms have to be reset by pressing the reset pushbutton.
The following alarms are available:
DISCHARGE PRESSURE COMPRESSOR

If discharge pressure is too high. This alarm will stop compressor .
SUCTION PRESSURE COMPRESSOR

If suction pressure is too low. This alarm will stop compressor. This alarm is bypassed
during start.
HIGH DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE COMPRESSOR

If discharge temperature gets too high. This alarm will stop compressor.
LOW DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE COMPRESSOR

If discharge temperature is too low. This alarm will stop compressor
LOW FLOW THROUGH WATER CHILLER

If flow through chiller is too low. This alarm will stop compressor after a short delay .
HIGH FLOW THROUGH WATER CHILLER

If flow through chiller is too high. This alarm will stop compressor after a short delay .
OVERLOAD COMPRESSOR
If overload relay or motor protection device for compressor 1 has tripped . This will stop
compressor .
LOW OIL FLOW COMPRESSOR

If oil flow is too low. This alarm will stop compressor after a short delay .
OVERLOAD CHILLER PUMP

If overload breaker for chiller pump has tripped . This will stop the pump and the
compressor .
Page 19 of 20
CONDENSING WATER COMPRESSOR

If no signal on condensing water flow/pump running. This alarm will stop compressor .
SENSORFAULT DISCHARGE PRESSURE COMPRESSOR

If pressure transmitter on discharge pressure compressor is defect. This alarm will stop
the compressor.
SENSORFAULT SUCTION PRESSURE COMPRESSOR

If pressure transmitter on suction line compressor 1 is defect. This alarm will stop the
compressor.
SENSORFAULT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE COMPRESSOR

If temperature transmitter on discharge line compressor 1 is defect. This alarm will stop
the compressor.
SENSORFAULT AMPERE COMPRESSOR

If ampere signal from converter compressor 1 is defect. This alarm will not stop the
compressor.
SENSORFAULT AMPERE CHILLER PUMP

If ampere signal from chiller pump 1 is defect. This alarm will not stop the compressor.
LOW OUTLET TEMPERATURE CHILLER

If outlet temperature from chiller is too low. This alarm will stop the compressor.
SENSORFAULT TEMPERATURE OUTLET

If temperature transmitter in chiller outlet is defect. This alarm will stop the compressor.
SENSORFAULT TEMPERATURE INTLET

If temperature transmitter in chiller inlet is defect. This alarm will stop the compressor.
SENSORFAULT DIFFERENCE PRESSURE

If pressure transmitter in chiller inlet/outlet is defect. This alarm will stop the
compressor.
EMERGENCY STOP
This alarm will stop the compressor
Alarms also appear in the history log.

Page 20 of 20
Document no.
Teknot_Instr_02988-3000
Teknotherm refrigerating machinery I/NH
www.teknotherm.com 10.03.2014 1 of 2
INSTRUCTIONS INERT GAS
Teknotherm o.no. 02988-3000
COMPONENTS ON REFRIGERATION UNIT
Reference is made to piping diagram for the inert gas plant in this manual
Item Name Type Comment

1 Screw compressor Bitzer CSH9593-300Y See chap 5
2 Solenoid valve Bitzer
3 Receiver valve
4 Gauge, high pressure -1/+40 bar
5 Gauge, low pressure -1/+15 bar
6 Pressure transmitter high pressure Danfoss AKS33
7 Pressure transmitter low pressure Danfoss AKS33
8 Temp.transmitter Danfoss MBT
9 Condenser Alfa Laval
10 Liquid level glass Teknotherm PG-233
11 Oil level monitoring kit Bitzer
12 3-way valve HY.09.02-000
13 Safety relief valve Muller
14 Stop valve, angle Danfoss SVA-ST
15 Drier housing SKY
16 Drier core Teknotherm
17 Receiver valve
18 Sight glass
19 Stop valve, straight Danfoss SVA-ST
20 Receiver valve
21 Receiver valve
22 Solenoid valve w/coil Danfoss EVR 15
23 Injection nozzle Bitzer
24 Receiver valve
25 Solenoid valve Danfoss EVRA40
26 Coil for solenoid valve Danfoss
27 Electronic expansion valve Danfoss ETS
28 Water chiller Alfa Laval
29 Temperature sensor Danfoss MBT5250
30 Temperature transmitter Danfoss MBT5252
31 Differential pressure transmitter 0-1,6bar
32 Safety relief valve Muller
33 Receiver valve
34 Stop valve Ball valve, BSP
35 Hot gas valve Danfoss ICS
Document no.
Teknot_Instr_02988-3000
Teknotherm refrigerating machinery I/NH
www.teknotherm.com 10.03.2014 2 of 2
INSTRUCTIONS INERT GAS
36 Pilot valve Danfoss CVC

37 Solenoid valve Danfoss EVM
38 Coil for solenoid valve Danfoss
39 Stop valve Danvalve SVA-ST
40 Vibration dampers JNHQ
41 Economizer Swep
42 Solenoid valve Danfoss EVR15
43 Expansion valve Danfoss TEZ12
Vibration damper
Product Name: Vibration damper

Product Model: JNHQ
Material: Rubber with steel
Technical Specification(please see below)
IRHD A H M FxE CF L S Max Max

Model
(daN/mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Load(kg) Deflec.(mm)
JNHQ 150x50M16 40 150 50 M16-M20 14.5X17 132 170 4 650 4
JNHQ 150x50M16 50 150 50 M16-M20 14.5X17 132 170 4 1050 4
JNHQ 150x50M20 60 150 50 M16-M20 14.5X17 132 170 4 1300 4
JNHQ 150x50M20 70 150 50 M16-M20 14.5X17 132 170 4 1500 4
JNHQ 180x66M16 40 180 60 M16-M20 18.5X21 150 190 5 875 5
JNHQ 180x66M16 50 180 60 M16-M20 18.5X21 150 190 5 1250 5
JNHQ 180x66M20 60 180 60 M16-M20 18.5X21 150 190 5 1700 5
JNHQ 180x66M20 70 180 60 M16-M20 18.5X21 150 190 5 2650 5
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

F2
F1
F4
F3
F2
F1
CIP solution out F4

F3
CIP solutions in
Cover
Zero plate
hole
channel
plate
=
Wärtsilä Moss AS
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Drawing no.: Rev: Description:
131381 00 Parts List

M1300-007std 01 Symbol table
131381-100-01 00 P & I Diagram
131381-100-02 00 P & I Diagram
131381-100-03 00 P & I Diagram
131381-050-01 00 Burner/Scrubber Unit Arrangement
131381-055-01 00 Adsorption Dryer Unit Arrangement
131381-056-01 00 Refrigeration Unit Arrangement
77-O2-010-058-01 00 Oxygen Analyzer Panel, Item No. 232
131381-059-01 00 Pneumatic Panel, Item No. 231
131381-061-01 00 Blower Arrangement, Item No. 100
131381-081-01 00 Customers Pneumatic Connections
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
Supply Codes
A: Fitted supply
B: Loose supply shipped from NO
S: Loose supply shipped from CN
Order No: 131381 GG 16.000 Nm³/h
TAG No Qty Article No Description Specification Remark Notes Supply

1 1 P0082-112 Shut off valve assembly DN450 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Inert gas main S - Loose Supply
1 P0137-112 Butterfly valve DN450 S31 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged A - Fitted Supply
1 N9951-006 Pneumatic actuator S92-2100 Double Acting A - Fitted Supply
1 M4597-003 Limit switch box S 50 A - Fitted Supply
1 M4963-002 Solenoid valve S63 5/2 way, 24V DC Connect: 1/4" NPT A - Fitted Supply
2 1 P0082-112 Shut off valve assembly DN450 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Inert gas to atmosphere S - Loose Supply
5 1 P0082-211 Shut off valve assembly DN400 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 10K Lugged Sea water main inlet S - Loose Supply
7 2 P0622-109 Control valve assembly DN300 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Combustion air fan outlet S - Loose Supply
1 N9955-004 Positioner w/IP & limit switch 4-20mA/15-3 psi/NO A - Fitted Supply
1 N9953-008 Manual operation kit DN300-DN600 A - Fitted Supply
10 1 P0622-111 Control valve assembly DN400 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Inert gas capacity S - Loose Supply
12 2 P0077-112 Manual valve assembly DN450 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Bypass refrigeration unit S - Loose Supply
1 P0077-113 Manual valve assembly DN500 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged S - Loose Supply
Revision No: 00
Revision date: 04.05.2015 Page 1 of 10
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
1 M4603-013 Gearbox S04 (80:1) for DN450-DN600 A - Fitted Supply
16 1 P0082-112 Shut off valve assembly DN450 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Inert gas bypass drier S - Loose Supply
17 1 P0082-104 Shut off valve assembly DN100 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Drain to bilge S - Loose Supply
22 1 P0622-114 Control valve assembly DN600 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: JIS 5K Lugged Sea water effluent line S - Loose Supply
23 1 M5169-008 Control valve assembly DN25 DN25 PN25GGG KVS1,6 GL/ME Flange: DIN PN25 Fuel oil return capacity A - Fitted Supply
1 M5136-007 Control valve for oil DN25PN25 GGG KVS1,6GL/ME Conn: DN25 PN25 A - Fitted Supply
1 M5137-005 Pneumatic actuator 240CM2 0,2-1BAR CS FE A - Fitted Supply
1 M5138-002 Pneumatic positioner+I/P con I/P POS. 4-20mA DIG. EEX A - Fitted Supply
1 N9475-001 Pressure reducing valve REG 0,5-6BAR 2 man. A - Fitted Supply
32 3 M0828-001 Shut off valve 1" Shut off valve for sight glass A - Fitted Supply
40 2 M0830-001 Test cock valve Brass Connect: 1/4" BSP For pressure gauge and switches A - Fitted Supply
41 1 m0832-001 Test cock valve DN8 Type 7.6645 Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
1 m0832-001 Test cock valve DN8 Type 7.6645 Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
6 M0832-001 Test cock valve DN8 Type 7.6645 Connect: 1/4" BSP For pressure gauge and switches A - Fitted Supply
42 5 M0832-001 Test cock valve DN8 Type 7.6645 Connect: 1/4" BSP For pressure gauges/transmitters B - Loose Supply
43 1 M0826-001 Shut off valve 1/2" Brass. A: CIM 70/BS Connect: 1/2" BSP Instrument air inlet A - Fitted Supply
45 3 M0825-001 Shut off valve 3/8" Brass. A: CIM 70/BS Connect: 3/8" BSP Air for cleaning of sight glass A - Fitted Supply
46 1 M0823-001 Control needle valve PN400 Fresh water to burner A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
49 1 m0823-001 Control needle valve PN400 A - Fitted Supply
1 m0823-001 Control needle valve PN400 A - Fitted Supply
50 1 P0624-007 Manual valve assembly DN200 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged Sea water to cooling jacket A - Fitted Supply
1 P0137-007 Butterfly valve DN200 S31 CS/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged A - Fitted Supply
1 M4603-001 Gearbox DN300 A - Fitted Supply
1 M4603-011 Lock device for gear for S04 (30:1) for DN200-DN350 A - Fitted Supply
64 2 P0436-108 Non return valve DN450 Material: Corten / 316L / NBR Flange JIS 5K S - Loose Supply
66 3 M0138-001 Non return valve Air flush of oil gun A - Fitted Supply
68 1 M0148-001 Non return valve A - Fitted Supply
73 1 N2855-005 Burner gun for M30 nozzle Conn. M30x2 A - Fitted Supply
80 1 N9280-003 Control valve 1" Type B-GHG-E-4-SO GS-C25 SAE flange, 15 - 40 bar A - Fitted Supply
84 2 N9340-003 Flexible oil hose, 3/4" Dunlop Hiflex 122 (EN853 1SN) Connect: M30x2,0 L=2m Oil to/from main burner A - Fitted Supply
85 1 N9341-002 Flexible oil hose, 1/4" Dunlop Hiflex 122 (EN853 1SN) Connect: M16x1,5 L=2m Oil to ignition burner A - Fitted Supply
86 1 M8280-001 Oil nozzle, main burner M30/5-55° - 1400kg/h Main burner A - Fitted Supply
87 1 M0106-002 Ignition burner A - Fitted Supply
88 1 M0105-003 Oil nozzle, ignition burner A - Fitted Supply
89 1 M3586-001 Ignition glow plug 12V A - Fitted Supply
90 3 M0231-001 Sight Glass Sight glass for burner A - Fitted Supply
99 1 N9143-001 Silencer, DN350 700x800x350 A - Fitted Supply
1 N9143-001 Silencer, DN350 700x800x350 A - Fitted Supply
100 1 N1194-020 Fan DN350 two stage BK31,5-1 (3,78/28-1) Flange: JIS 5K Item 101 and 102 B - Loose Supply
1 N1194-020 Fan DN350 two stage BK31,5-1 (3,78/28-1) Flange: JIS 5K Item 101 and 102 B - Loose Supply
103 1 M2442-010 El. motor M3BP 280 SMC2 125 kW 440V 60Hz IP55 A - Fitted Supply
1 M2442-010 El. motor M3BP 280 SMC2 125 kW 440V 60Hz IP55 A - Fitted Supply
104 1 M2442-010 El. motor M3BP 280 SMC2 125 kW 440V 60Hz IP55 A - Fitted Supply
1 M2442-010 El. motor M3BP 280 SMC2 125 kW 440V 60Hz IP55 A - Fitted Supply
105 8 M3201-001 Resilient mounting RA350A w/stop A - Fitted Supply
8 M3201-001 Resilient mounting RA350A w/stop A - Fitted Supply
106 8 M3201-001 Resilient mounting RA350A w/stop A - Fitted Supply
8 M3201-001 Resilient mounting RA350A w/stop A - Fitted Supply
107 1 N9339-001 Flexible bellow Type Flebu A - Fitted Supply
1 N9339-001 Flexible bellow Type Flebu A - Fitted Supply
108 2 P0563-113 Flexible bellow, DN350 Link-Flex style 10/EPDM Flange: JIS 5K Blower outlet S - Loose Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
114 2 M0239-001s Sight glass DN400 complete NS 6141/ISO 1751-A400-LW Connect: welding type, DN400 A - Fitted Supply
117 16 M1873-001s Sea water spray nozzle Moss-3 1/2-90-48, 90° Connect: 3 1/2" BSP For burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
118 12 M3677-005 Fresh water spray nozzle 60 dg spray angle AISI 316 Connect: 1/2" BSP F.W. flushing burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
120 1 N9939-004 Orifice DN40 PN16, orifice hole 16 mm AISI 316L A - Fitted Supply
124 1 N3185-002 Flexible hose 1/2" x 1 m Connect.: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
1 N3185-002 Flexible hose 1/2" x 1 m Connect.: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
125 1 N9439-001 Fresh water spray nozzle PNRI 60° spray angle Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
1 N9439-001 Fresh water spray nozzle PNRI 60° spray angle Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
126 1 M1800-001 Fresh water spray nozzle PNRI 60° spray angle Connect: 3/8" BSP F.W. injection air inlet burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
130 1 P0451-011 Wet filter for Scrubber 2792x900x200 For burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
131 1 P0450-011 Demister for scrubber 2792x1970x150 For burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
138 1 P0074-004 Ball valve assembly DN40 NO/NC 24V DC Connect: Buttweld F.W. cleaning of burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
1 P0080-004 Ball valve DN40 S7000 316/316/316/PTFE Connect: Buttweld A - Fitted Supply
139 1 P0074-004 Ball valve assembly DN40 NO/NC 24V DC Connect: Buttweld F.W. cleaning of burner/scrubber unit A - Fitted Supply
150 1 P0074-101 Ball valve assembly DN15 NO/NC 24V DC Connect: 1/2" BSP F.W. injection air inlet burner/scrubber A - Fitted Supply
1 P0080-101 Ball valve DN15 S7000 316/316/316/PTFE Connect: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
151 1 n8087-001 Ball valve DN15 closed F180 24V DC Connect: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
1 n8087-001 Ball valve DN15 closed F180 24V DC Connect: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
1 N8084-001 Ball valve DN15 A - Fitted Supply
1 N8084-001 Ball valve DN15 A - Fitted Supply
1 N9365-001 Pneumatic actuator A - Fitted Supply
1 N9365-001 Pneumatic actuator A - Fitted Supply
1 N1068-001 Solenoid valve 5/2 24V DC Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
152 1 N3296-002 Solenoid valve 2/2-way NC air Air to ignition burner A - Fitted Supply
153 1 P0073-003 Ball valve DN25 fail open 24V DC Connect: Buttweld Fuel oil recirculation A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
1 N9951-026 Pneumatic actuator S93-0833 Single Acting A - Fitted Supply
156 1 P0072-003 Ball valve DN25 fail close 24V DC Connect: Buttweld Fuel oil to burner A - Fitted Supply
1 N9951-026 Pneumatic actuator S93-0833 Single Acting A - Fitted Supply
157 1 N3296-002 Solenoid valve 2/2-way NC air Air flush to burner A - Fitted Supply
158 1 N3297-003 Solenoid valve 2/2-way NC oil 24V DC Fuel oil to ignition burner A - Fitted Supply
159 1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Fresh water to burning A - Fitted Supply
160 1 M0121-010 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-10 bar / 0-1 MPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Instrument air pressure A - Fitted Supply
161 1 M0115-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-1 bar / 0-100 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Combustion air to burner A - Fitted Supply
162 1 M0116-002 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-2,5 bar / 0-250 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Sea water to cooling jacket A - Fitted Supply
163 2 M0115-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-1 bar / 0-100 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Blowers outlet B - Loose Supply
164 1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Sea water main inlet scrubber A - Fitted Supply
165 1 M0119-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-40 bar / 0-4 MPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Fuel oil to burner A - Fitted Supply
166 1 M0119-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-40 bar / 0-4 MPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Fuel oil return A - Fitted Supply
167 1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 A - Fitted Supply
1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 A - Fitted Supply
168 1 M0115-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-1 bar / 0-100 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 I.G. outlet drier B - Loose Supply
175 1 M0124-001 Thermometer 0-100°C Straight type Connect: 1/2" BSP Sea water main inlet scrubber A - Fitted Supply
178 1 M0170-001 Temp. transmitter 0-100°C Sea water temp. cooling jacket A - Fitted Supply
179 1 M0124-001 Thermometer 0-100°C Straight type Connect: 1/2" BSP Inert gas outlet scrubber A - Fitted Supply
180 1 M0170-001 Temp. transmitter 0-100°C A - Fitted Supply
182 1 M1623-004 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-1 barg Connect:1/4" Constant pressure in deck main B - Loose Supply
183 1 M1623-008 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-10 barg Connect: 1/4" A - Fitted Supply
184 1 M1623-006 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-4 barg Connect: 1/4" Low sea water pressure scrubber inlet A - Fitted Supply
1 M0169-001 Pressure switch 0.1-2.1 bar Barksdale P1H-B30-SS Connect: 1/4" NPT Low sea water pressure scrubber inlet A - Fitted Supply
185 1 M1623-011 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-40 barg Connect: 1/4" A - Fitted Supply
188 1 M0170-001 Temp. transmitter 0-100°C I.G. temp outlet scrubber A - Fitted Supply
1 M0164-002 Temperature switch 66-87*C Connect: 1/2" BSP Scrubber outlet temperature A - Fitted Supply
191 1 M0181-001 Level switch Connect: 1" BSP Low s.w.level cooling jacket A - Fitted Supply
193 2 M0181-001 Level switch Connect: 1" BSP High sea water level scrubber A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
200 2 M0086-001 Photocell complete Burner flame A - Fitted Supply
203 1 M0135-001 Filter complete A - Fitted Supply
209 1 M0094-003 Ignition Transformer A - Fitted Supply
212 1 M1623-005 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-2,5 barg Connect: 1/4" Sea water scrubber overboard B - Loose Supply
213 1 M1623-004 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-1 barg Connect:1/4" Constant drier pressure B - Loose Supply
214 1 M1623-004 Pressure Transmitter Scale: 0-1 barg Connect:1/4" I.G. pressure outlet scrubber A - Fitted Supply
219 1 M0171-001 Temp. transmitter 0-100°C Connect: 1/2" BSP I.G. temp outlet drier B - Loose Supply
229 1 P0383-006 Fuel oil pump - Twin unit 40 R38 W199 Flange: SAE J518C-3000PSI B - Loose Supply
232 1 N9374-014 Oxygen Analyzer Panel Moss IGS Analyzer H3600a B - Loose Supply
233 1 M1738-001 Main control panel GG S - Loose Supply
241 1 P0585-001 Starter blower DOL for two stage blower Starter blower 1 S - Loose Supply
242 1 P0585-001 Starter blower DOL for two stage blower Starter blower 2 S - Loose Supply
243 1 M1681-003 Starter fuel oil pump 1&2 Max. 7,5kW 15A S - Loose Supply
249 1 M0190-001 Alarm sirene Type: 172.24 24V DC B - Loose Supply
253 1 P0006-002 Burner / Scrubber unit GG - Nom. size: 17 500Nm3/h GG1J S - Loose Supply
262 1 M1833-005 Reduction valve w/filter 1/2" With mounting brackets A - Fitted Supply
280 1 P0219-003 Gas Flow Monitor PITOBAR Averaging pitot tube For pipe dimension DN450 B - Loose Supply
1 P0243-004 Diff.pressure transmitter FKC-X22-V5 Range: 0 ->60 mbar B - Loose Supply
400 1 N8218-010 Refrigeration unit GA GG - Nom. size: 17 500Nm3/h Cooler1D S - Loose Supply
401 1 N9499-007 R407c cooler type CW 615kW Fresh water cooled Chilled water cooler A - Fitted Supply
402 1 N8799-007 Heat Exchanger Type Thermopanel 17500Nm3/h Connect.: DN 500 JIS 5K Inert Gas Cooler A - Fitted Supply
403 1 N8108-012 Chilled Water storage tank Type 1500L Con. DN150 GG21000-5900 A - Fitted Supply
407 1 N8112-001s Filling bucket Type MC-60L Chilled Water Circulation System A - Fitted Supply
408 1 n8113-001 Expansion tank Type SGP N 35 Chilled Water Circulation System A - Fitted Supply
410 1 N9161-001 Manual pump Type Nira 6B A - Fitted Supply
413 1 P0582-004 Chilled water circulation pump TD150-24/4 SLHC Flange: DN150 DIN PN16 A - Fitted Supply
414 1 P0583-004 El. motor 22 kW 440V 60Hz For TD150-24/4 SLHC A - Fitted Supply
417 1 N8239-010 Demister for cooling plant style 194, ø1345 x 200 A - Fitted Supply
419 1 N8123-006s Strainer DN 150 Cast Iron Y-Strainer DIN 3202 F1 Chilled Water Circulation Pump Inlet A - Fitted Supply
420 1 M7910-003 Flow indicator DN50 DIN PN10/16 B - Loose Supply
421 1 M0156-001 Ball valve DN15 2013M AISI 316L PN64 Connect: 1/2" BSP A - Fitted Supply
422 1 N8209-004 Balancing valve DN150 Type STA-F DN 150 Cooler outlet A - Fitted Supply
424 1 P0369-006 Manual valve assembly DN150 CI/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: DIN PN10 Chilled Water Circulation System A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
1 P0367-001 Valve handle S01 with 10 pos. notch plate for DN25-DN200 A - Fitted Supply
1 P0343-006 Butterfly valve DN150 S31 CI/NiAB/316/Buna-N Flange: DIN PN10 A - Fitted Supply
427 1 M0818-001 Shut off/non return valve 1/2" BGV-456022NR PN16 RG5 19C Connect: 1/2" BSP Chilled Water Manual Pump Outlet A - Fitted Supply
428 1 M0815-001 Control valve 3/4" BGV-456022 PN16 RG5 Connect: 3/4" BSP Expansion Tank Inlet A - Fitted Supply
429 2 N8121-001 Safety relief valve Set point 3,0 bar Connect: in 3/4"BSP out 1"BSP Chilled Water Pressure Safety Valve A - Fitted Supply
440 3 M0832-001 Test cock valve DN8 Type 7.6645 Connect: 1/4" BSP For pressure instruments A - Fitted Supply
462 1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Pressure brine pump inlet A - Fitted Supply
464 1 M0115-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-1 bar / 0-100 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Inert gas outlet Refrigeration unit A - Fitted Supply
465 1 M0117-004 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-4 bar / 0-400 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Pressure brine pump outlet A - Fitted Supply
466 2 P0563-010 Flexible bellow, DN200 Link-Flex style 10/EPDM Flange: DIN PN10 Inlet/outlet Evaporator A - Fitted Supply
467 2 P0563-409 Flexible bellow, DN150 Link-Flex style 10/EPDM Flange: DIN PN10 and JIS 5K Inlet/outlet condenser A - Fitted Supply
469 1 N8137-001 Air vent Chilled water circ. system A - Fitted Supply
1 N8137-001 Air vent Chilled water circ. system A - Fitted Supply
470 1 N9989-001 Sensor central for gas sensors MPU4c B - Loose Supply
1 N9989-002 Gas sensor for room MP-DS HFC B - Loose Supply
1 N9989-003 Gas sensor for pipe MP-DR HFC B - Loose Supply
476 1 N8882-001 Thermometer -20 - +40°C Straight type, L=63mm Connect: 1/2" BSP Brine temp inert gas cooler outlet A - Fitted Supply
478 1 M0124-002 Thermometer 0-100°C Straight type, L= 160 mm Connect: 1/2" BSP Inert gas outlet refrigeration unit A - Fitted Supply
479 1 N8882-001 Thermometer -20 - +40°C Straight type, L=63mm Connect: 1/2" BSP Chilled Water Temp Cooler Inlet A - Fitted Supply
498 1 M0171-001 Temp. transmitter 0-100°C Connect: 1/2" BSP Inert gas outlet Refrigeration unit A - Fitted Supply
500 1 P0007-001 Adsorption dryer GG - Nom. size: 17 500Nm3/h S - Loose Supply
501 1 P0625-031 Shut off valve assembly DN400 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Inert gas inlet ADS 1 A - Fitted Supply
1 P0623-031 Butterfly valve DN400 S31 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut A - Fitted Supply
502 1 P0625-031 Shut off valve assembly DN400 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Inert gas inlet ADS 2 A - Fitted Supply
503 1 P0625-031 Shut off valve assembly DN400 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Inert gas outlet ADS 1 A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
504 1 P0625-031 Shut off valve assembly DN400 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Inert gas outlet ADS 2 A - Fitted Supply
505 1 P0626-029 Shut off valve assembly DN300 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 lug/undercut Regeneration air outlet ADS 1 A - Fitted Supply
506 1 P0626-029 Shut off valve assembly DN300 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 lug/undercut Regeneration air outlet ADS 2 A - Fitted Supply
507 1 P0625-029 Shut off valve assembly DN300 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Regeneration air cooler inlet A - Fitted Supply
508 1 P0626-129 Shut off valve assembly DN300 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: JIS 5K lug/undercut Regeneration purging to atmosphere A - Fitted Supply
1 P0623-129 Butterfly valve DN300 S31 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: JIS 5K Lug/undercut A - Fitted Supply
509 1 P0625-027 Shut off valve assembly DN200 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lug/undercut Purge air valve A - Fitted Supply
510 1 P0437-007 Non return valve DN400 Material: Corten / 316L /Viton Flange DIN PN10 Regeneration heater outlet ADS 1 A - Fitted Supply
511 1 P0437-007 Non return valve DN400 Material: Corten / 316L /Viton Flange DIN PN10 Regeneration heater outlet ADS 2 A - Fitted Supply
512 1 P0627-009 Manual valve assembly DN300 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged Cooling air inlet A - Fitted Supply
1 P0623-009 Butterfly valve DN300 S31 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged A - Fitted Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
513 1 P0627-007 Manual valve assembly DN200 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged Control of purge gas A - Fitted Supply
1 P0623-007 Butterfly valve DN200 S31 CS/316/316/Viton Flange: DIN PN10 Lugged A - Fitted Supply
514 2 M0156-001 Ball valve DN15 2013M AISI 316L PN64 Connect: 1/2" BSP Drain of adsorption vessels A - Fitted Supply
515 1 N9314-001 Shut off valve assembly DN50 Fig. 901 Hi-Lok for steam Flange: DIN PN16 Stem heater inlet A - Fitted Supply
1 N9315-001 Butterfly valve DN50 Fig. 901 Hi-Lok for steam Flange: DIN PN16 A - Fitted Supply
1 N9316-001 Pneumatic actuator PremiAir PRA-004 DA A - Fitted Supply
516 1 N8937-002 Steam valve manual BSA1T DN50 DIN PN10/16 Steam inlet control valve A - Fitted Supply
517 1 M0826-001 Shut off valve 1/2" Brass. A: CIM 70/BS Connect: 1/2" BSP Instrument air inlet drier A - Fitted Supply
518 1 N8937-003 Steam valve manual BSA1T DN25 DIN PN10/16 Condensate isolating valve A - Fitted Supply
521 1 P0580-005 Regeneration fan DN300 CF 784-331 Flange: DIN2576 PN10 Regeneration air A - Fitted Supply
522 1 P0581-003 El. motor M2QA-H 250 M2A 63 kW 440V 60Hz IP55 Regeneration blower motor A - Fitted Supply
523 1 P0453-012 Flexible bellow, DN300 Link-Flex style 10/NBR Flange: DIN PN10 Regeneration blower inlet A - Fitted Supply
524 1 P0453-012 Flexible bellow, DN300 Link-Flex style 10/NBR Flange: DIN PN10 Regeneration blower outlet A - Fitted Supply
525 1 N8149-013 Steamheater ST-TR-2,0-900-900-5x2R-150 A - Fitted Supply
526 1 P0222-004 El. heater RQD 440V/340kW 60Hz A - Fitted Supply
527 1 N8149-010 Cooling Coil CW-TR-2,0-840-840-6R-21-H1 Cu/CuSn A - Fitted Supply
528 1 N8936-001 Steam filter Fig.33 DN25 DIN PN10/16 Steamheater outlet A - Fitted Supply
529 1 N8935-001 Steam trap FT14-10 DN25 DIN PN10/16 Steamheater outlet A - Fitted Supply
540 2 M0830-001 Test cock valve Brass Connect: 1/4" BSP A - Fitted Supply
561 2 M0115-005 Pressure gauge, dia. 100mm Scale 0-1 bar / 0-100 kPa Connect: 1/4" BSP AISI 316 Pressure ADS inlet A - Fitted Supply
571 2 N8430-002 Temp. transmitter 0-250°C PT 100, 4-20mA, L=250 KH 250 UP 250 Temperature inlet adsorption towers A - Fitted Supply
572 1 N8152-001 Thermometer 0-250°C Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150 Connect: 1/2" BSP male A - Fitted Supply
574 1 N8152-001 Thermometer 0-250°C Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150 Connect: 1/2" BSP male Regeneration air cooler inlet A - Fitted Supply
576 1 N8237-001 Thermometer 0-100°C Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150 Connect: 1/2" BSP male, 90° Cooler outlet A - Fitted Supply
582 1 N8430-003 Temp. transmitter 0-250°C PT 100, 4-20mA, L=160 KH 160 UP 250 End heating control A - Fitted Supply
583 1 N8154-001 Dew point transmitter DMT 242 Dryer outlet A - Fitted Supply
900 1 M1551-002 Spare parts box Aluminium 47L, 582x385x277 Spare parts B - Loose Supply
901 1 M8281-001 Oil nozzle insert, main burner M30/5-55° - 1400kg/h Spare part for item no. 86 - 100% capacity B - Loose Supply
902 1 M0105-003 Oil nozzle, ignition burner Spare part for item no. 88 B - Loose Supply
903 1 N9340-003 Flexible oil hose, 3/4" Dunlop Hiflex 122 (EN853 1SN) Connect: M30x2,0 L=2m Spare part for item no. 84 B - Loose Supply
Revision No: 00
Wärtsila Moss
Parts list
904 1 N9341-002 Flexible oil hose, 1/4" Dunlop Hiflex 122 (EN853 1SN) Connect: M16x1,5 L=2m Spare part for item no. 85 B - Loose Supply
905 1 M3586-001 Ignition glow plug 12V Spare part for item no. 89 B - Loose Supply
907 1 M1833-005001 Filter insert for Reduc. Valve Filtering screen 5 µm B - Loose Supply
908 5 M0130-001 Filter insert (element) Only available in box of 5 pcs Spare part for item no. 203 B - Loose Supply
909 1 N9374-000395 Filter elements 1 pc = 5 elements Spare part for item no. 232 B - Loose Supply
910 1 N9374-000390 Sensor Complete with o-ring Spare part for item no. 232 B - Loose Supply
911 1 N9989-017 Spare sensor HFC Calibrated for R-407C SP-42A incl. circuit board Spare part for item no. 470 B - Loose Supply
912 1 M2506-001 Ball bearing 6316/C3 Spare part for item no. 103 & 104 (Drive-End) B - Loose Supply
913 1 M2506-001 Ball bearing 6316/C3 Spare part for item no. 103 & 104 (Non-Drive-End) B - Loose Supply
914 1 N9956-003 Spare part set For refrigeration unit Size: 17500Nm3/h for refrigeration unit B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-001 Coil for solenoid valve 220V 50/60Hz, 10W-18VA B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-003 Vacuum hose 1,5m black 3/8" B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-004 Oil pump 3/8" fl B - Loose Supply
4 N9957-005 Dry filter core 1 set = 3 pcs B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-006 Coil for solenoid valve 24V/10W/60Hz B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-007 Bottle adapter for freoncharge 1/2" inside x 3/8" fl. outside B - Loose Supply
1 N9957-011 Cleaning device for condenser B - Loose Supply
915 1 N2416-003 Oil nozzle insert, main burner M30/5-55° - 700kg/h Spare part for item no. 86 - 50% capacity B - Loose Supply
946 1 M0232-001 Photocell LDS, insert 500mm cable Spare part for item no. 200 B - Loose Supply
Revision No: 00
JH
JH
SS JH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
RECOMMENDED FREE SPACE FOR 450 DESIGN DATA
FRONT PLATE MAINTENANCE
DESIGN PRESSURE: 0,6 BAR
LEAKAGE TEST PRESSURE: 0,9 BAR
210
A A
N8 LEAKAGE TEST CLASS WITNESS: NO
LIFTING LUGS (4OFF) PI 23
1900
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY: LR
N1
1000
HOLE Ø45 SG 90-1 / 32-1
870
ITEM 231
255
1580
PI 165
PI 166
PI 160
VALVE 80 ITEM 73/87
N2
SG 90-3 /
PI 162 32-3
B ITEM 23 SG 90-2 / B
32-2
VALVE 50
ITEM 126
O.D. Ø2800
VALVE 150
1580
45 PI 161
TT 180
COG
C C
N6/N7
FOUNDATION PLAN
N5
VALVE 80
7090
6220
6410
5750
5400
D D
N3 DETAIL A
4500
4238 (COG)
( 1 : 10 )
VALVE 138 TT 178

TI 175
00
28
VALVE 139 PI 164
PS 184
2505
LS 193-2
E E
N5 LS 193-1
2420
740 (N5)
251 (N6/N7)
51 (COG)
1300
A HOT SURFACE
N5
350
N4
SIGHT GLASS AND
INSPECTION HATCH
HANDRAIL
0
F N3 F
80
(WÄRTSILÄ SUPPLY)
2
COG TI 170
1275
1391 (N5)
N8
1413 (N6/N7)
528
NOTES: O2 SAMPLING
POINT
APPLICATION ON MILD STEEL LS 191
1 COAT CONSEAL PRIMER 40 MICRONS N2
30°
1 COAT PILOT II TOPCOAT 50 MICRONS
660
G
COLOUR: MUNSELL 7.5 BG 7/2 18 (COG) TT 188
G
JH
Issuer
sign.
ACCES FOR MAINTENANCE ON PT 214

BURNER TOP AND INSTRUMENTS AS APPROPRIATE INSPECTION HATCH
SIGHT GLASS
2
RECOMMENDED FREE SPACE FOR 00

SAFETY RAILS RECOMMENDED 24° Rev. Date / Sign. Description
284
DEMISTER AND WET FILTER MAINTENANCE

DURING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WORK INVOLVING Date Drawn Traced Scale
28
00
WORKING HEIGHT ABOVE 2M MAA

20120829 Checked Approved 1:20
THIS IS NOT PART OF STANDARD DELIVERY JH
NOZZLE NO. DESTINATION PIPE/FLANGE CONNECTIONS
USE LIFTING LUGS (4 OFF) ON GENERATOR TOP N1 AIR INLET DN 450 JIS B2220 5K MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM
N2 INERT GAS OUTLET DN 450 JIS B2220 5K FRONT PLATE
IF SUPPORT IS REQUIRED. Title
DSME H. 2405
Purchaser
N3 SEA WATER INLET DN 400 JIS B2220 10K LIFTING LUGS (2OFF) INERT GAS GENERATOR GG Replaces Replaced by
FLEXIBLE RUBBER RECOMMENDED BETWEEN EPQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE. SEA WATER 700
H N4 DN 800 JIS B2220 5K HOLE Ø18 GENERATOR ARRANGEMENT H
EFFLUENT
N5 FRESH WATER INLET DN 40 JIS B2220 10K 1275 1175 Internal doc. no.:
WEIGHT: APPROX 8100 KG ITEM 253
N6 FUEL OIL INLET O.D. Ø28x2,0 131381-050-01 00
131381
Order No.
WEIGHT OF FRONT PLATE: 300KG 1850 1900

N7 FUEL OIL OUTLET O.D. Ø28x2,0 SIZE: 16.000Nm³/h Format
Group No. Sheet 1 of 1 sheets A1
N8 INSTRUMENT AIR 1/2" BSP 9000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DESIGN DATA
DESIGN PRESSURE: 0,6 bar
A LEAKAGE TEST PRESSURE: 1,0 bar A
7660 (LL1) LEAKAGE TEST CLASS WITNESS: NO
1440 (LL1) CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY: LR
30 1000 (LL1) 1000 (LL1) 30
INSPECTION HATCH INSPECTION HATCH
DN400 DN400
STEAM ELECTRIC
HEATER HEATER
510 511 525 526
ADS-1 513
B ADS-2 B
531-1 531-2
509
N1 DESICCANT DRAIN HATCH N1 TI 572 N1

DN250
DRYER HEATER
N6 501 502 PANEL 534
4060
COOLER N8/N9
527 N7 MT 583
3860 (LL1)
DESSICANT DRAIN HATCH 512
N2 N2 N2
DN 250
507 503 504
2430
2300
C
1900 N3 C
1800
1950
N3 N3
BLOWER
505 506 521
1500
1170
1170 D 508 D
N10
800
N4 N5
330
508 TT 582
140
140
2030 INSPECTION HATCH INSPECTION HATCH SECTION B-B

WITH DRAIN PLUG SECTION A-A WITH DRAIN PLUG
SECTION C-C
9100
5957
D D
5657
3790 NOZZLE NO. DESTINATION PIPE/FLANGE CONNECTION
FOUNDATION PLATES (14 OFF) 3030 N1 INLET WET GAS DN 450 JIS B2220 5K
300 YARD SUPPLY
B C 518 1440 N2 OUTLET DRIED GAS DN 450 JIS B2220 5K
1440 529 516
150 N3 PURGING TO ATMOSPHERE DN 300 JIS B2220 5K
120 CHECKER PLATE LADDER 528 N9 N8 LADDER N4 DRAIN 1/2" BSP W/ VALVE
515 CHECKER PLATE
N6 N7 N5 DRAIN 1/2" BSP W/ VALVE
13
N6 COOLING WATER SUPPLY DN 65 JIS B2220 5K
120
N7 COOLING WATER RETURN DN 65 JIS B2220 5K
N8 STEAM SUPPLY DN 50 JIS B2220 16K
300
N9 CONDENSATE OUTLET DN 25 JIS B2220 16K
13
0
80
N10 INSTRUMENT AIR 1/2" BSP W/ VALVE
80
0
1440
( 1 : 10 )
E E
13
565
565
56
5
LIFTING LUGS QTY. DESCRIPTION HOLE DIM. WEIGHT OF UNIT

E F F N4 N5
2833
LL1 4 TOTAL UNIT ø65 29.000 KG
2880
514-1 565 514-2 - -
( 1 : 10 ) 565 LL2 4 EL. HEATER
PLATFORM W/ LL3 3 FAN - -
GRATING LL4 2 EL. MOTOR - -
4070
1440
NOTES:
EXTERNAL SURFACE TREATMENT ON MILD STEEL:
SANDBLASTING TO SA 2,5
1 COAT CONSEAL PRIMER TOTAL DRY FILM THICK. 40 MICRONS
F N10 1 COAT PILOT II TOPCOAT TOTAL DRY FILM THICK. 50 MICRONS F
COLOUR: MUNSELL 7,5 BG 7/2
DRYER HEATER SAFETY RAILS RECOMMENDED DURING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WORK

PANEL 534 INVOLVING WORKING HEIGHT ABOVE 2m.
405
THIS IS NOT PART OF STANDARD DELIVERY.
9100
PI 561-1
1145 TT 571-1
PI 561-2 USE LIFTING LUGS (4 OFF) ON DRYER TOP IF SUPPORT IS REQUIRED. FLEXIBLE
RUBBER RECOMMENDED BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE.
LADDER TT 571-2
TOTAL WEIGHT: APPROX. 29.000 kg
6320
N1 DESICCANT: APPROX. 15.000 kg
N2
N3
5050
1490
A A
G B C G
JH
Issuer
sign.
8800
2875
PLAN 00
Rev. Date / Sign. Description
Date Drawn Traced Scale
MAA
2690 JH
2880 MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM
4070 Title
DSME H. 2405
Purchaser
INERT GAS GENERATOR GG Replaces Replaced by
H H
ADSORPTION DRYER
SECTION D-D Internal doc. no.:
UNIT ARRANGEMENT 131381-055-01 00
131381
Order No.
( 1 : 50 ) SIZE: 16.000 Nm3/h Format

Group No. Sheet 1 of 1 sheets A1
9000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1411 (LL4) 708 (LL4)
N1
N1
AIR VENT
A 469-1 A
N2
AIR VENT
99 (LL4) 469-2
B B
N8 ISO VIEWS
Starter cabinet
3780
N6 N7
N4
N3
C C
N5
962
13
N10
1228
1960
2955
722
462
330
2695
3370 (LL2) 236
3690 (LL3)
4850 (LL3)
5315
D D
5770 (LL2)
75 (LL1) 6375 (LL1) LIFTING LUGS QTY. DESCRIPTION HOLE DIM. WEIGHT OF UNIT
300
120
6590 FOUNDATION PLATES (6 OFF)
IS YARD SUPPLY LL1 4 TOTAL UNIT Ø45 17.000 KG
4755 LL2 4 CHILLED WATER UNIT Ø35 5.500 KG
2532 LL3 2 COMPRESSOR - 1.330 KG
LL4 2 HEAT EXCHANGER COVER Ø35 200 KG
1765 - - PUMP - 352 KG
700 - - EVAPORATOR - 650 KG
- - CONDENSER - 600 KG
4 OFF LIFTING LUG
PL. 30 HOLE Ø45
E NOZZLE NO. DESTINATION PIPE/ FLANGE CONNECTION E
3705
N1 INERT GAS IN DN500 JIS 5K
N2 INERT GAS OUT DN500 JIS 5K
N1 N2 N3 COOLING WATER INLET DN150 DIN PN16
N5 N4 COOLING WATER OUTLET DN150 DIN PN16
PI 465 N5 DRAIN DN50 JIS 5K
TT 498 TI 478 PI 462 414 N6 SAFETY VALVE 5/8" FL
422 N7 SAFETY VALVE 5/8" FL
N8 SAFETY VALVE 5/8" FL
N10 DRAIN 1/2" BSP
PI 464 TI 479
3010
6020
469-2
F 466-2 NOTES: F
TI 476 FOUNDATION PLAN EXTERNAL SURFACE TREATMENT ON MILD STEEL:
SCALE 1:40 SANDBLASTING TO SA 2,5
1 COAT CONSEAL PRIMER 40 MICRONS
3800
N3, N4, N6, N7 1 COAT PILOT II TOPCOAT 50 MICRONS

419 COLOUR: MUNSELL 7,5 BG 7/2
424
2851
N8 TOTAL WEIGHT: APPROX. 17.000 KG

GLYCOL/ WATER: (25%/ 75%) 1.800 L
403
N10
1974 (LL2)
G G
1670
JH
Issuer
sign.
1194
900
3710 (LL1)
4049
Space reqired 00
884 (LL3)
3300 (LL4)
Rev. Date / Sign. Description
90 (LL1)
for service Date Drawn Traced Scale
454 (LL2)
MAA
Control cabinet - signal cable(s) JH
Customer cable entry at bottom MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM
Title
DSME H.2405
6300
Purchaser
INERT GAS GENERATOR Replaces Replaced by
H 6445 H
6590
REFRIGERATOR
Internal doc. no.:
UNIT ARRANGEMENT
131381
131381-056-01 00
Order No.
PLAN VIEW Starter cabinet - 440V supply

SIZE: 16.000 Nm³/h Format
Customer cable entry at bottom Group No. Sheet 1 of 1 sheets A1
9000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
JH
JH
INERT GAS GENERATOR GG

MB JH
Wärtsilä Moss AS
LIST OF DRAWINGS
131381-110-01 00 Main Control Panel, Layout, Item No. 233

131381-110-02 00 Main Control Panel, Part List
131381-112-01 00 Main Control Panel, ‘CD’ Plc Layout
131381-112-02 00 Power Distribution System Terminal List X19
131381-112-03 00 Main Control Panel, ‘CD’ Power/Signal Distribution
131381-112-04 00 Main Control Panel, ‘CD’ Digital Signals
131381-112-08 00 Main Control Panel, ‘CD’ Analogue Signals
131381-112-09 00 Main Control Panel, Emergency Shutdown ‘CD’
131381-112-10 00 Main Control Panel, Ethernet Switch and Network
131381-120-01 00 Customers Cable Plant
131381-122-01 00 Alarm/Stop Description
131381-127-01 00 Starter Blower 1, Layout, Item No. 241
131381-127-02 00 Starter Blower 1, Part List
131381-127-03 00 Starter Blower 1, ‘CD’
131381-127-04 00 Starter Blower 1, ‘CD’
131381-127-05 00 Starter Blower 1, ‘CD’ Digital/Analogue Signals
131381-128-01 00 Starter Blower 2, Layout, Item No. 242
131381-128-02 00 Starter Blower 2, Par List
131381-128-03 00 Starter Blower 2, ’CD’
131381-128-04 00 Starter Blower 2, ’CD’
131381-128-05 00 Starter Blower 2, ’CD’ Digital/Analogue Signals
131381-133-01 00 Starter Fuel Oil Pump 1-2, Layout, Item No. 243
Wärtsilä Moss AS
131381-133-02 00 Starter Fuel Oil Pump 1/2, Part List

131381-133-03 00 Starter Fuel Oil Pump 1/2, ‘CD’
131381-153-01 00 Terminal Box Layout, Item No. 263
131381-153-02 00 Terminal Box Part List
131381-153-03 00 Terminal Box ‘CD’, Plc Layout
131381-153-04 00 Terminal Box ‘CD’, Digital Signals
131381-153-05 00 Terminal Box ‘CD’, Analogue Signals
131381-160-01 00 Dryer Heater Panel Layout, Item No. 500
131381-160-02 00 Dryer Heater Panel, Part List
131381-160-03 00 Dryer Heater Panel, ’CD’ Heating and Fan Control
131381-160-04 00 Dryer Heater Panel, ’CD’ Heating and Fan Control
131381-160-05 00 Dryer Heater Panel, ’CD’, Plc Layout
131381-160-06 00 Dryer Heater Panel, ‘CD’, Digital Signal
131381-160-09 00 Dryer Heater Panel, ‘CD’, Analogue Signal
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: Date:
Item no: Part no: Description: Page:
P0043-129txt VALVE INSTRUCTION .................................... 11 - 1

M4597-003txt LIMIT SWITCH BOX ........................................ 11 - 7
- S 50 - Instruction
M4963-002txt SOLENOID VALVE .......................................... 11 - 9
- S63, 5/2 way, 24V DC - Instruction
N9955-004 Positioner with .................................................. 11 - 12
- IP converter and Limit switch - V200E
P0013txt BUTTERFLY VALVE........................................ 11 - 19
- SERIES 30/31
N9951-004txt PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR ............................... 11 - 23
- INSTRUCTION
1,2,16,17 P0082-101-113Lugged shut off valve with limit switch ............ 11 - 26
- DN50-500 JIS 5K
5 P0082-201-213Lugged shut off valve with limit switch ............ 11 - 27
- DN50-500 JIS 10K
7,10 P0622-101-113CONTROL VALVE.......................................... 11 - 28
- DN50-500 JIS 5K
12 P0077-101-113Lugged shut off valve with limit switch ............ 11 - 29
- DN50-500 JIS 5K
22 P0622-114 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY....................... 11 - 30
- DN600 JIS 5K
23 M5169-008 CONTROL VALVE FOR OIL............................ 11 - 31
- DN25 GGG Flange:DINPN25 - Instruction
32 M0828-001 SHUT OFF VALVE........................................... 11 - 41
- 1 Brass - CIM 70/BS
40,540 M0830-001 TEST COCK VALVE DN8 ................................ 11 - 42
- Connect: 1/ BSP - Brass
41,42,440 M0832-001 TEST COCK VALVE DN8 ................................ 11 - 43
- Connect: 1/4 BSP - AISI 316
43,517 M0826-001 SHUT OFF VALVE........................................... 11 - 44
- 1/2 Brass - CIM 70/BS
45 M0825-001 SHUT OFF VALVE........................................... 11 - 45
- 3/8 Brass - CIM 70/BS
11-I
Wärtsilä Moss AS
46,49 M0823-001 CONTROL NEEDLE VALVE............................ 11 - 46

- PN400 - Connect: 1/4 BSP
50 P0624-007 BUTTERFLY VALVE........................................ 11 - 47
- DN200 DIN PN10
64 P0436-101~111NON RETURN VALVE .................................. 11 - 48
- DN100 - DN600 JIS 5K
66 M0138-001 NON RETURN VALVE..................................... 11 - 49
- Connect: tube ø8 OD comp.ends
68 M0148-001 NON-RETURN VALVE..................................... 11 - 50
- RDH 28L
80 N9280-003 CONTROL VALVE 1 BSP............................... 11 - 51
84,903 N9340-003 Flexible oil hose 3/4 ....................................... 11 - 53

- Connect: M30 x 2,0
85,904 N9341-002 Flexible oil hose 1/4 ....................................... 11 - 54
- Connect: M16 x 1,5
87 M0106-002 IGNITION BURNER ......................................... 11 - 55
88 M0105-003 OIL NOZZLE, IGNITION BURNER .................. 11 - 56

- 0,6 Gal/h 80° H
89 M3586-001 IGNITION GLOW PLUG 12V ........................... 11 - 57
- CONNECTION M14 x 1,25
105,106 N0041-001txt RESILIENT MOUNTING .................................. 11 - 58
- Type RA - User manual
107 N9339-001 FLEXIBLE BELLOW......................................... 11 - 60
- DN350
108 P0563-101-117FLEXIBLE BELLOW ....................................... 11 - 62
130 P0451-011 WET FILTER FOR SCRUBBER ...................... 11 - 63
- 2792 x 900 x 200
131 P0450-011 DEMISTER FOR SCRUBBER ......................... 11 - 64
- 2792 x 1970 x 150
138,139 P0074-001~005BALL VALVE ASSEMBLY ............................. 11 - 65
- DN15 - DN50
150 P0074-101 BALL VALVE .................................................... 11 - 66
- DN15 DIN PN10
11-II
Wärtsilä Moss AS
151 N8087-001 BALL VALVE ASSEMBLY................................ 11 - 67

- DN15 CLOSED F180
152,157 N3296-002 SOLENOID VALVE .......................................... 11 - 68
- 2/2-way NC air - Direct operated 1/4
153 P0073-001~005BALL VALVE.................................................. 11 - 70
- DN15-DN50 OPEN
156 P0072-003 BALL VALVE .................................................... 11 - 71
- DN25 CLOSED
158 N3297-003 SOLENOID VALVE .......................................... 11 - 72
- 2/2-way NC oil - Direct operated 1/4
159,164,167,462,465M0117-004PRESSURE GAUGE .................................... 11 - 74
- Type 01.18.3.A - ø100 - Range 0 - 4bar
160 M0121-010 PRESSURE GAUGE........................................ 11 - 75
- Type 01.10.3.A - ø100 - Range 0 - 10bar
161,163,168,464,561M0115-005PRESSURE GAUGE .................................... 11 - 76
- Type 01.18.3.A - ø100 - Range 0 - 1bar
162 M0116-002 PRESSURE GAUGE........................................ 11 - 77
- Type 01.18.3.A - ø100 - Range 0 - 2,5bar
165,166 M0119-005 PRESSURE GAUGE........................................ 11 - 78
- Type 01.18.3.A - ø100 - Range 0 - 40bar
175, 179 M0124-001 THERMOMETER ............................................. 11 - 79
- Range: 0-100ºC - Connect: 1/2 BSP
178, 180,188 M0170-001 PT100 - TEMP. TRANSMITTER ...................... 11 - 80
- L=100mm, 0-100ºC, 4-20mA - 1/2 BSP
182~185,212-214M1623-004~011Pressure Transmitter .................................. 11 - 81
191,193 M0181-001 LEVEL SWITCH ............................................... 11 - 82

- Type 003S - User manual
200 M0086-001 BURNER FLAME ............................................. 11 - 84
- Flame Scanner complete
203 M0135-001 FILTER COMPLETE ........................................ 11 - 86
- 1/4 BSP
209 M0094-003 Ignition Transfoemer ........................................ 11 - 88
- 260VA, 230-250V
11-III
Wärtsilä Moss AS
219,498 M0171-001 PT100 - TEMP. TRANSMITTER ...................... 11 - 89

- L=250mm, 0-100ºC, 4-20mA - Connect: 1/2 BSP
229 P0383-001~006FUEL OIL PUMP UNIT .................................. 11 - 90
- AFI-Twin unit
249 M0190-001 ALARM SIRENE............................................... 11 - 92
- Type: 172.24
262 M1833-005 REDUCTION VALVE ....................................... 11 - 93
- w/filter 1/2 - G1/2 , 0.5-10 bar, 5 m filter
280 P0219-003 Averaging Pitot Tube........................................ 11 - 97
420 M7910-003 FLOW INDICATOR DN 50 ............................... 11 - 99
- DIN PN 10/16
421 M0156-001 SHUT OFF VALVE DN15................................. 11 - 100
- Connect: 1/2 BSP
422 N8209-004 BALANCING VALVE DN80.............................. 11 - 101
- Type STAF DN150
427 M0818-001 SHUT OFF/ NON RETURN ............................. 11 - 104
- VALVE - 1/2 BSP PN16
470 N9989-001 SENSOR CENTRAL ........................................ 11 - 107

- FOR GAS SENSORS
478 M0124-002 THERMOMETER ............................................. 11 - 114
- Range: 0-100ºC - Connect: 1/2 BSP
507,509 P0625-021-033BUTTERFLY VALVE ...................................... 11 - 115
- DN50-500 DIN PN10
- DN300 JIS 5K
510,511 P0437-001~011NON RETURN VALVE .................................. 11 - 117
- DN100 - DN600 DIN PN10
- DN300 DIN PN10
- DN200 DIN PN10
11-IV
Wärtsilä Moss AS
514 M0156-001 SHUT OFF VALVE DN15................................. 11 - 120

- Connect: 1/2 BSP
515 N9314-001 SHUT OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY ...................... 11 - 121
- DN50 DIN PN16
523,524 P0453-001~017FLEXIBLE BELLOW ...................................... 11 - 122
- DN25 - DN600 DIN PN 10/16
525 N8149-013 Steamheater..................................................... 11 - 123
- ST-TR-2,0-900-900-5x2R-150
526 P0222-004 EL. HEATER .................................................... 11 - 124
- RQD 440V/340kW 60Hz
527 N8149-010 Cooling Coil ...................................................... 11 - 125
- CW-TR-2,0-840-840-6R-21-HCu/CuSn
528 N8936-001 STEAM FILTER................................................ 11 - 126
- Fig. 33 DN25 DIN PN 10/16
529 N8935-001 STEAM TRAP .................................................. 11 - 128
- FT 14-10 DN25 DIN PN10/16
571 N8430-002 PT100 - TEMP. TRANSMITTER ...................... 11 - 129
- L=250mm, 0-250ºC, 4-20mA - Connect: 1/2 BSP
572,574 N8152-001 THERMOMETER 0-250 oC ............................. 11 - 130
- Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150
576 N8237-001 THERMOMETER 0-100 oC ............................. 11 - 132
- Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150
583 N8154-001 DEW POINT TRANSMITTER .......................... 11 - 134
- DMT 242
232 N9374-014 OXYGEN ANALYZER PANEL ......................... 11
- Moss IGS Analyzer H3600a
11-V
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0043-129txt Item:
Rev: 03 Date:
20081001
VALVE INSTRUCTION
Installation Considerations - Piping and Valve Orientation and Placement

Valve Location and Orientation in Piping
1. Valve Location
1.1. Butterfly valves should be installed if possible a minimum of 6 pipe diameters from other line
elements, i.e. elbows, pumps, valves, etc. Of course, 6 pipe diameters are not always practical, but
it is important to achieve as much distance as possible.
1.2. Where the butterfly valve is connected to a check valve or pump, use an expansion joint between
them to ensure the disc does not interfere with the adjacent equipment.
2. Valve Orientation
2.1. In general, we recommends the valve to be installed with the stem in the vertical position and the
actuator mounted vertically directly above the valve; however, there are those applications as
discussed below where the stem should be horizontal. Valves should not be installed upside down.
2.2. For slurries, sludge, mine tailing, pulp stock, dry cement, and any media with sediment or particles,
we recommend the valve to be installed with the stem in the horizontal position with the lower disc
edge opening in the downstream direction.
11-1
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-2
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Installation Procedure
General Installation
1. Make sure the pipeline and pipe flange faces are clean. Any foreign material such as pipe scale,
metal chips, welding slag, weidling rods, etc., can obstruct disc movement or damage the disc or
seat.
2. The elastomer seat has molded o-rings on the face of the seat. As a result, no gaskets are required
as these o-rings serve the function of a gasket.
3. Align the piping and then spread the pipe flanges as a distance apart so as to permit the valve body
to be easily dropped between the flanges without contacting the pipe flanges (see figure below).
4. Check to see that the valve disc has been positioned to a partially open position, with the disc edge
about 1/4 to 3/8 from the face of the seat, approximately 10 o open (see figure below)
11-3
Wärtsilä Moss AS
5. Insert the valve between the flanges as shown below, taking care not to damage the seat faces.
Always pick the valve up by the locating holes or by using a nylon sling on the neck of the body.
Never pick up the valve by the actuator or operator mounted on top of the valve.
6. Place the valve between the flanges, center it, and then span the valve body with all flange bolts,
but do not tighten the bolts. Carefully open the disc to the full open position, making sure the disc
does not hit the adjacent pipe I.D. Now systematically remove jack bolts or other flange spreaders,
and hand-tighten the flange bolts as shown in figure below.
Very slowly close the valve disc to ensure disc edge clearance from the adjacent pipe flange I.D.
Now open the disc to full open and tighten all flange bolts per specification as sown in the figure
below.
Finally, repeat a full close to full open rotation of the disc to ensure proper clearances (see figures
for Initial Centering& Flanging of Valve and Final Aligning & Tightening of Flange Bolts)
11-4
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Installation with Flange Welding

When butterfly valves are to be installed between ANSI welding type flanges, care should be taken to
abide by the following procedure to ensure no damage will occur to the seat:
1. Place the valve between the flanges with the flange bores and valve body aligned properly. The disc
should be in the 10o position.
2. Span the body with the bolts.
3. Take this assembly of flange-body-flange and align it properly to the pipe.
4. Tack weld the flanges to the pipe.
5. When tack welding is complete, remove the bolts and the valve from the pipe flanges and complete
the welding of the flanges. Be sure to let the pipe and flanges cool before installing the valve.
11-5
Wärtsilä Moss AS
NOTE! Never complete the welding process (after tacking) with the valve between pipe flanges. This
causes severe seat damage due to heat transfer.
Disassembly and Assembly

Disassembly
Remove the handle, gear operator, or actuator from actuator mounting flange. Remove the Spirolox ®
retaining ring and the two C-ring stem retainers from the stem hole, then remove the stem, bushing and
seal. Remove the disc from the seat, protecting disc edge at all times. Push the seat into an oval shape,
then remove the seat from the body.
Assembly
Push the valve seat into an oval and push it into the body with seat stem holes aligned to body stem
holes. Insert stem seal and bushing. Push stem into the stem hole of body until the bottom of the stem
is flush with the inner top edge of the seat.
Install a light coating of silicone or grease on the I.D. of seat. Insert the disc into the seat by lining up the
disc hole with the stem hole of the seat.
NOTE! The broached double flats in the disc must be toward the bottom of the valve body.
With a downward pressure and rotating the stem back and forth, push the stem until the stem touches
the bottom of the body stem hole. Make certain that when pushing stem through disc bottom, the
broached flats of stem and disc are aligned.
Replace the stem bushing and two stem retainers, then replace the Spirolox ® retaining ring back into
position.
11-6
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M4597-003txt Item:
Rev: 00 Date:
20081114
LIMIT SWITCH BOX
S 50
Instruction
(B) O-RING SEALS

Seals on the shaft and housing provide a
waterproof enclosure and prevent
internal corrosion.
(C) SHAFT BEARINGS

The limit switch has acetal bearings on
the top and bottom of the shaft which
reduce friction and eliminate shaft
binding.
(A) CAMS / CAM ADJUSTMENT (D) SWITCHES

Featured in the Series 50 Valve Status Both Valve Status Monitors come
Monitors are uniquely designed cams. A standard with 2 SPDT Micro switches.
cam for each switch is mounted directly
to the output shaft and each cam is color (E) TERMINAL BLOCK
coded - red adjustment screw matches
red cam (which closes valve), green The internal switches are pre-wired to a
terminal block. The block has been
screw matches green cam (which opens
valve). The cams are infinitely adjustable designed for ease of wiring installation
from the top by finger touch or regular with clearly marked wire numbers for
both open and closed switches.
screw driver with no special tools
needed. The adjustment screws rotate
the eccentric shaped cams. The cams (F) CONDUIT ENTRIES
will not slip out of adjustment from line For ease of wiring, the limit switch box
vibration. Standard factory settings are features two conduit entries. The limit
to the open and closed positions for 90° switch box has 1/2 NPT conduit
travel. To adjust the cams, first lossen connections.
the locking screw, make cam adjustment
then retighten locking screw.
11-7
Wärtsilä Moss AS
LIMIT SWITCH BOX S 50

This waterproof unit is UL listed and
CSA, CE certified NEMA-4,4X. The limit
switch box features a die cast aluminium
housing coated with a chemical resistant
epoxy for futher protection.
DIMENSIONS
11-8
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
20081114
SOLENOID VALVE
S63, 5/2 way, 24V DC
Instruction
11-9
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-10
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-11
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9955-004 Item:
Rev: 01 Date:
20110610
Positioner with
IP converter and Limit switch
V200E
11-12
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-13
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-14
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-15
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-16
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-17
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-18
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0013txt Item:
Rev: 00 Date:
BUTTERFLY VALVE 20090609
SERIES 30/31
11-19
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-20
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-21
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-22
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9951-004txt Item:
Rev: 00 Date:
20081002
PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
INSTRUCTION
General Pneumatic System Recommendations

Air supply lines should be run in accordance with a Standard Piping Practice, and should not have
exaggerated loops which may trap condensate.
All pipe ends should be thoroughly cleaned and deburred after cutting to ensure that the pipeline is
clear of cuttings.
Where air pipelines are subjected to extremes of temperature, the system should be fitted with air
drying equipment.
If pipelines are hydraulically tested, the lines should be blown down with high pressure air to clear
all water prior to connecting the lines to the actuator.
Where a system is dependent on air filter equipment, the air filters should be in positions that allow
easy access for maintenance and/or draining.
Where pneumatic valve positioners or pneumatic controllers are installed in a valve actuator
assembly, oil mist lubricated air should not be used unless the manufacturer states specifically that
the positioner or controller is compatible with lubricated air. In general, lubricated air is not
recommended for a positioner.
Where pipe fitting sealants or tapes are used, they should be applied to the male threads only.
When applied to female threads, excess compound or tape can be transmitted into the actuator
control lines and cause malfunctions in downstream equipment.
Assembly and Testing
Connect the compressed air supply to the actuator input ports. Cycle the actuator fully open and fully
closed to check for proper travel and absence of air leaks. If compressed air is applied to Port A and the
actuator reaches the end of travel, there should be no air flow out of Port B, and vice versa.
There should be no air flow between the end caps and the body, through the travel stops, or out the top
or the bottom of the pinion. A solution of soap and water applied to the sealing points can indicate leaks
that are too small to be audible.
Disassembly
Disconnect the compressed air from the actuator. If the actuator is installed on a valve, remove it and
take it to a clean work area, if possible. Remove the indicator pointer. Remove both end caps by
loosening the hex head end cap bolts.
11-23
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Remove both pistons by rotating the pinion counterclockwise until the piston heads are protruding from
the body. Pull the pistons out. Take off the pinion retaining ring and acetal washer, then remove the
pinion from the body. The pinion bearings, o-rings, cam and spacer may then be removed.
Troubleshooting
Symptom Probable Cause Check Remedy
Loss of Power Low air supply pressure, or Air supply pressure at Boost air supply pressure,
damaged O-rings actuator, leakage across repair air supply line leaks,
O-rings replace O-rings
Binding between valve and Misalignment of coupling Alignment Realign coupling
actuator
Valve pops out of seat Valve torque too high, Valve torque, actuator Repair valve, use proper
and slams open actuator sized too small, or sizing calculations, size of size actuator, use larger
insufficient air supply flow air supply lines and/or air suplpy lines and/or
solenoid valve solenoid valve with higher
flow
11-24
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Item No Qty Description

1 1 Body
2 2 Piston
3 1 Pinion
4 2 End Cap
5 12 max Spring Cartridge
6 1 Upper Pinion Bearing
7 1 Lower Pinion Bearing
8 1 Retaining Ring
9 1 Washer, Acetal
10 2 Bearing Pad, Acetal
11 2 Guide Ring, Acetal
12 2 Lock Nut
13 2 Travel Stop Screw
14 2 O-ring, Travel Stop
15 8 Hex Head Cap Screw
16 2 O-ring, Piston
17 2 O-ring, End Cap
18 1 O-ring, Upper Pinion
19 1 O-ring, Lower Pinion
20 8 Washer, Stainless Steel
21 1 Position Indicator Pointer
22 1 Flat Head Screw
23 1 Cam, Internal Travel Stop
24 1 Spacer, Int. Travel Stop
11-25
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0082-101-113 Item: 1,2,16,17
Rev: 00 Date:
Lugged shut off valve with limit switch 20120112
DN50-500 JIS 5K
11-26
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0082-201-213 Item: 5
Rev: 00 Date:
DN50-500 JIS 10K
11-27
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0622-101-113 Item: 7,10
Rev: 00 Date:
CONTROL VALVE 20120314
DN50-500 JIS 5K
11-28
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0077-101-113 Item: 12
Rev: 00 Date:
DN50-500 JIS 5K
11-29
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0622-114 Item: 22
Rev: 00 Date:
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY 20141222
DN600 JIS 5K
11-30
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M5169-008 Item: 23
Rev: 00 Date:
20090428
CONTROL VALVE FOR OIL
DN25 GGG Flange:DINPN25
Instruction
General safety instructions Proper shipping and appropriate storage are

assumed.
Caution!
For installation and maintenance work on the
The control valve may only be mounted, valve, make sure the relevant section of the
started up or serviced by fullytrained and pipeline is depressurized and, depending on
qualified personnel, observing the accepted the processmedium, drained as well. If nec-
industry codes andpractices. Make sure essary, allow the control valve to cool down
employees or third persons are not exposed or warm up to reach ambient temperature
to any danger. All safety instructions and prior to starting any work on the valve.
warnings in these mounting and operating Prior to performing any work on the valve,
instructions, particularly those concerning make sure the supply air and control signal
assembly, start-up and maintenance, must are disconnected or blocked to prevent any
be observed. hazards that could be caused by moving
The control valves fulfill the requirements of parts.
the European Pressure Equipment Directive Special care is needed when the actuator
97/23/EC. Valves with a CE marking have a springs are pretensioned. These actuators
declaration of conformity that includes infor- are labeled correspondingly and can also be
mation about the applied conformity assess- identified by three long bolts at the bottom of
ment procedure. The declaration of the actuator. Prior to starting any work on the
conformity is available on request. valve, you must relieve the compression
For appropriate operation, make sure that from the pretensioned springs.
the control valve is only used in areas where
Design and principle of operation
the operating pressure and temperatures do
not exceed the operating values which are The Pneumatic Control Valves consist of a sin-
based on the valve sizing data submitted in gle-seated Globe Valve and a Pneumatic Actua-
the order. The manufacturer does not tor.
assume any responsibility for damage
caused by external forces or any other exter- Thanks to the modular design, the actuators can
nal influence! Any hazard swhich could be be exchanged, and the standard version of the
caused in the control valve by the process valve can be supplemented to form a version
medium,operating pressure, signal pressure with insulating section ormetal bellows seal.
or by moving parts are to be prevented by
means of the appropriate measures. In the micro-flow valve version, a micro-trim ele-
ment is installed in the valve body instead of the
usual seat-plug assembly.The process medium
11-31
Wärtsilä Moss AS
flows through the valve in the direction indicated Unscrew the lock nut (6.2) and stem connec-
by the arrow. The position of the plug (3) deter- tor nut (6.1).Firmly press the plug together
mines the flow through the valve seat (2). The with the plug stem into the seat ring. Thread
position of the plug (3) is changed by the signal the stem connector nut and lock nut down-
pressure acting on the diaphragm of the actua- wards.
tor (bench range). Plug (3) and actuator stem
Remove the stem connector clamps (7)and
(8.1) are connected via the stem connector (7)
the ring nut (8.2) from the actuator(8). Slide
and sealed by the spring-loadedring packing
the ring nut over the plug stem.
(4.2).
Place actuator onto the valve bonnet (5)and
Fail-safe position secure with the ring nut (8.2).
The control valve provides two different fail-safe Read bench range (or bench range with pre-
positions depending on the arrangement of the loaded springs) and fail-safe action from the
springs in the actuator: actuator's nameplate (e.g. 0.2 to 1 bar and
"Actuator stem extends").
Actuator stem extends The lower value of the bench range corre-
sponds to the lower bench range value to bead-
When the signal pressure is reduced or the pow-
justed; the upper bench range value cor-
er supply fails, the springs move the actuator
responds to the lower bench range value. The
stem downwards and close the valve.When the
Actuator bears the corresponding symbol.
signal pressure increases again, the valve opens
acting against the force of the springs.
For actuators with "Actuator stem extends",
apply a signal pressure to the lower dia-
Actuator stem retracts phragm chamber which corresponds to the
When the signal pressure is reduced or the pow- lower bench range value(e.g. 0.2 bar). For
er supply fails, the springs move the actuator actuators with "Actuator stem retracts", apply
stem upwards and open the valve.When the sig- a signal pressure to the upper diaphragm
nal pressure increases again, the valve closes chamber which corresponds to the upper
acting against the force of the springs. bench range value(e.g. 1 bar).
Thread down the stem connector nut (6.1) by
Assembling valve and actuator hand until it makes contact with the actuator
The basic pneumatic actuator can be replaced stem (8.1). Then, turn it another 1/4 turn and
by an electric actuator or a pneumatic actuator secure this position with the lock nut (6.2).
with additional handwheel. Position the stem connector clamps (7) and
screw tight. Align the travel indicator scale
A pneumatic actuator (with or without hand- (5.3) with the tip of the stem connector.
wheel) can be exchanged for another pneumatic
actuator in a different size. Note on disassembling an actuator!
Before disassembling an actuator with fail-safe
If, in the valve-actuator assembly, the travel action "Actuator stem extends" and particularly
range of the actuator is larger than the travel an actuator with pretensioned springs, apply a
range of the control valve, the actuator springs pressure to the lower signal pressure
are preloaded by the manufacturer so that the connection that slightly exceeds the lower
travels match. bench range value (see nameplate of the
actuator), so that you can loosen the ring nut
Assembly and adjustment (8.2).
If the valve and actuator have not been pre-
assembled by the manufacturer, or if the actua-
tor of a control valve is to be replaced by an actu-
ator of another type or another size, proceed as
described below.
11-32
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-33
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Pretensioning springs in actuator If a valve is to be attached to a larger actuator
version “Actuator stem extends” (rated travel of actuator larger than the rated
travel of the valve), just the first half of the bench
To achieve a greater positioning force, the range of the actuator can be used.
springs in actuators with "Actuator stem ex-
tends" can be preloaded with up to 12.5 %(actu- Example:
ator sizes 120 and 240 cm²) or up to 25 % (350
Valve DN 100 with 30 mm rated travel and 1400
cm² and higher) of their travel or bench range.
cm² actuator with 60 mm rated travel, 0.4 to 1 bar
bench range:
Example:
If the springs are preloaded with, for example, A useable bench range of 0.2 to 0.6 bar is avail-
0.1 bar for a bench range of 0.2 to 1 bar, the able for the half valve range.
bench range is shifted by 0.1 bar to result in a
bench range of 0.3 to 1.1 bar (0.1 bar corre- NOTE! Actuators which have been preloaded by
sponds to a preload of 12.5 %). When adjusting the manufacturer without an attached valve are
the valve, the lower benchrange is to be set to marked with a label.In addition, you will notice
0.3 bar. Make sure the new bench range of 0.3 three extended bolts on the bottom diaphragm
to 1.1 bar is indicated on the nameplate as the case. They enable you to evenly relieve the
bench range with pretensioned springs! preload of the springs when disassembling the
actuator.
Valve and actuator with different
rated travels Installation
Actuator version "Actuator stem extends" Mounting position
NOTE! Valves that have a travel smaller than The valve can be mounted in any desired posi-
the rated travel of the actuator always need to tion. However, vertical installation with the actu-
use pretensioned springs. ator pointing upwards is preferable for valves in
nominal size DN 100 or larger to facilitate main-
Example: tenance.For valves with insulating section or
Valve DN 100 with 30 mm rated travel and 1400 metal bellows seal, or for actuators weighing
cm² actuator with 60 mm rated travel, 0.4 to 2 bar more than 50 kg, mount a suitable support or
bench range. suspension for the actuator.
Set the signal pressure required for tension-

ing the springs above the signal pressure of
1.2 bar (1.2 to 2 bar range) which corre-
sponds to the mid actuator travel (30 mm) to
1.6 bar. NOTE! The valve must be installed with as little
vibration as possible and free of stress.
Thread stem connector nut (6.1) until it
touches the actuator stem.
Flush the pipeline thoroughly before installation.
Secure the position with lock nut and attach
stem connector as described in section 2.1. NOTE! Do not insulate control valves which must
Enter the 1.6 to 2.4 bar bench range valid for conform to NACE MR 0175.
the mounted valve on the nameplate of the
actuator. Signal pressure line
Actuator version "Actuator stem Connect the signal pressure line to the lower dia-
phragm case for valves with actuator version
retracts" "Actuator stem extends" and to the upper dia-
Caution! phragm case for valves with actuator version
The springs in the actuator version Actuator "Actuator stem retracts".The lower signal pres-
stem retracts cannot be pretensioned! sure connection of the Actuator is located at the
side of the yoke of the lower diaphragm case.
11-34
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Test connection the stem connector clamps (7) and the ring-
nut (8.2).
If there is a test connection (G 1/8) at the upper
flange of a valve version with metal bellows seal, Remove the actuator from the valve bonnet.
you can check the tightness of the bellows Standard valve version
there.Particularly for liquids and vapors, we rec-
ommend you to install a suitable leak indi-cator Stuffing box packing
at the test connection, such as a contact pres-
Remove the body nuts (1.1) as well as the
sure gauge, an outlet into an open vessel or an
valve bonnet (5) together with the plug stem
inspection window.
and plug from the body.
Operation Unscrew the stem connector nut and locknut

(6.1 and 6.2) from the plug stem.
(e.g. reversing the fail-safe action of the actuator
etc.)For details concerning operation, see Screw the threaded bushing (5.2) out of the
Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8311 stuffing box. Pull the plug stem together with
EN for the Pneumatic Actuator. the plug out of the valvebonnet.
Pull all packing parts out of the packing-
Maintenance–Replacing parts chamber using a suitable tool. Replace dam-
aged parts. Clean packing chamber
The control valve is subject to natural wear,
thoroughly.
especially at the seat, plug and packing.Depend-
ing on the application, the valve needs to be Remove the gasket (1.2) and carefully clean
checked regularly to prevent against possible sealing faces in the valve body and on the
failures. If leakage occurs, this could be caused bonnet.
by a damaged packing or a defective metal bel- Apply lubricant to all the packing parts and
lows.If the valve does not seal properly, the tight the plugstem (6).
shut-off may be impeded by dirt or other impuri-
ties caught between the seat and plug, or by Slide the plug stem with plug into the valve
damaged seat joints. Remove the parts, clean bonnet.
them thoroughly and replace them, if necessary.
NOTE! Before servicing or disassembling the

control valve, depressurize the concerned sec-
tion of the plant and drain it, if necessary,
depending on the medium used. Switch off the
signal pressure for the actuator and remove the
signal pressure line. As valves are not free of
cavities, there might still be residual medium in
the valve.This applies, in particular, for valve ver-
sions with insulating section and metal bellows
seal.
CAUTION!! On performing any work on the

valve, first shut off the signal pressure, discon-
nect the signal pressure line and remove the
actuator. Insert new flat gasket (1.2) into the body.
Carefully place the valve bonnet onto the
Removing the actuator: valve body and secure with nuts(1.1)
Before disassembling an actuator with fail- Carefully slide the stuffing box parts over the
safe action "Actuator stem extends" and par- plug stem into the packing chamber. Make
ticularly an actuator with preloaded springs, sure to keep the proper order. Screw in the
apply a pressure to the lower signal pressure threaded bushing(5.2) and tighten.
connection that slightly exceeds the lower Loosely screw the lock nut (6.2) and stem
bench range value (see nameplate), so that connector nut (6.1) onto the plugstem.
you can remove the ring nut (8.2). Remove
11-35
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Mount the actuator and adjust the upper and Valve with insulating section or metal
lower bench range values as described ear- bellows seal
lier.
Stuffing box packing
Seat and/or plug
Remove the stem connector nut and locknut
We recommend you to also replace the packing (6.1 and 6.2) from the plug stem extension
(4.2) when exchanging the seat and plug.To (6.3). Unscrew the threaded bushing (5.2)
exchange the packing, proceed as described out of the stuffing box.
over
Remove nuts (5.4) and carefully lift the bon-
Plug: net (5) over the plug stem extension.
Remove the old plug and replace it with a new Pull all stuffing box parts out of the packing
plug with plug stem. It is possible to use the old chamber using a suitable tool.Replace dam-
plug again, provided it has been reworked prop- aged parts. Clean packing chamber thor-
erly. Apply lubricant to the plug stem before oughly.
installation. Remove the gasket (5.5) in the intermediate
piece (12) and carefully clean the sealing
Reworking the plug faces.
Slight damage at the sealing edges of the plug Apply lubricant to all the packing parts and
can be eliminated by returning it on a lathe. Soft- the plug stem (6).
sealing plugs can only be reworked until dimen-
sion x is reached, and if the seat bore exceeds Insert new gasket (5.5) in the intermediate
12 mm. For seat bores of 63 mm and larger, the piece. Carefully place the bonnet over the
entire sealing ring can be exchanged, if neces- plug stem extension onto the bonnet and
sary (the plug parts are screwed together). secure with nuts (5.4).
Carefully slide the stuffing box parts over the
Seat: plug stem extension into the packing cham-
Unscrew the seat (2) using the appropriate seat ber. Make sure to keep the proper order.
wrench (see EB 029 EN). Apply lubricant to the Screw in the threaded bushing (5.2) and
thread and sealing cone of the new seat (or pos- tighten.
sibly the old seat when it has been reworked or Loosely screw the lock nut (6.2) and stem
thoroughly cleaned) and screw it in. connector nut (6.1) onto the plugstem.
Micro-trim insert Mount the actuator and adjust the upper and
lower bench range values as described ear-
In this version, the complete micro-trim element lier.
can be unscrewed from the valve body using a
socket wrench (width across flats 27) and disas- Plug
sembled for cleaning. If individual parts are dam- When exchanging the plug, check the packing
aged, exchange the entire micro-trim element. (4.2) or, preferably, replace it.
Nominal sizes DN 15 to 150: To unscrew the

plug (6) from the plug stem extension(6.3), screw
two nuts onto the protruding thread of the exten-
sion to hold the plug stem extension in place.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the version with the bel-
lows seal (no bellows in the version with insulat-
ing section), make sure no torque is transmitted
to the bellows, which is connected to the inter-
mediate piece. We recommend you to use a
clamping tool (seeEB 029 EN).
11-36
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Remove the nuts (1.1).
Remove the intermediate piece (12) to-
gether with the plug stem extension, plug-
stem and plug from the valve body.
Remove gasket (1.2) and carefully clean the
sealing faces in the valve body and on the
intermediate piece.
Use an appropriate wrench to hold the nuts
stationary, which are screwed onto the plug
stem extension. Clamp the plug stem using a
suitable tool and screw it out of the plug stem
extension.
Caution!
Do not twist the plug stem ex-tension with the
welded-on bellows!5.
Apply lubricant to the end of the plug stem

(6) of the new or old, reworked plug
(3).Check whether the two washers (6.4) are
still in the plug stem extension (6.3). Screw
the plug stem firmly into the plug stem exten-
sion (6.3); tightening torque is 50 Nm for Ø
10 mm and 80 Nm for Ø 16 mm.
To complete assembly, refer to Reassembly.
Metal bellows
Nominal sizes DN 15 to 150:
Unscrew the plug (3) together with the plug
stem (6) from the plug stem extension (6.3)
as described for replacing the seat earlier.
Pull the plug stem extension with the welded-
on metal bellows (6.6) out of the intermediate
section (12).
Clean the sealing faces on the intermediate
piece.
Insert a new plug into the intermediate piece
and screw down the nut (6.5).
Caution!
Do not twist the metal bellows
Check whether both washers (6.4) are still in the

plug stem extension (6.3). Apply lubricant to the
thread of the plug stem and firmly screw the plug
stem into the plug stem extension (6.3) with a
tightening torque of 50 Nm for a plug stem diam-
eter of 10 mm and 80 Nm for a diameter of
16mm.
11-37
Wärtsilä Moss AS
11-38
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Reassembly Material identifying marks
Insert new gasket (1.2) into the valve body. Guide bushing, seat and plug have the following
Place the intermediate piece (12) onto the identifying marks:
valve body (1) and secure with nuts (1.1).
Guide bushing(groove on plane face)
Insert new gasket (5.5) into the intermediate
piece. Place the valve bonnet (5) onto the No groove: 1.4305
intermediate piece and secure with bolts Sharp recessed groove: 1.4571
(5.4) and nuts. Observe the tightening tor-
ques specified in EB 029 EN. Flat recessed groove: Hastelloy
Tighten the threaded bushing (5.2). Seat
Loosely screw the lock nut (6.2) and stem The material number according to DIN is either
connector nut (6.1) onto the plug stem exten- stamped or engraved on the seat.
sion (6.3) or plug stem.
Stellited seats are marked by a stamped-on
Mount the actuator and adjust the upper and "st".
lower bench range values as described ear-
lier. Plug
Groove below the plug stem thread:
Replacing the collar or seal
For version with pressure-balanced plug: No groove: 1.4006
Sharp recessed groove: 1.4571
Unscrew the stem connector nut and lock nut
(6.1 and 6.2) from the plug stem. Two sharp recessed grooves: 1.4301
Remove the body nuts (1.1) and carefully lift Flat recessed groove: Hastelloy
off the valve bonnet (5) with plug stem (6). When other materials are used, either the
Screw the threaded bushing (5.2) out of the material number or its designation is
stuffing box. Pull plug stem and plug(3) out of engraved on the plug.
the bonnet. The Kvs value and characteristic are engraved
Remove gasket (1.2) and carefully clean the on the plug.
sealing faces in the valve body and on the
bonnet. Stellited plugs are marked by an engraved
st .
Completion of reassembly:
Dimensions and weights
Insert new gasket (1.2) into the valve body.
Carefully place the valve bonnet on the valve of the valve versions can be found in Data Sheet
body and secure with nuts(1.1). Observe the T8015 EN.
tightening torques specified in EB 029 EN.
Slide the stuffing box parts over the plug
stem into the packing chamber. Make sure to
keep the proper order.
Screw in the threaded bushing (5.2) and
tighten.
Loosely screw the lock nut (6.2) and stem
connector nut (6.1) onto the plugstem.
Mount the actuator and adjust the upperand
lower range values as described earlier.
11-39
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Customer inquiries
If you encounter any problems, please submit
the following details:
Order number
Type, product number, nominal size and ver-
sion of the valve
Pressure and temperature of the process
medium
Flow rate in m3/h

Bench range of the actuator (e.g. 0.2 to 1
bar)
Has a strainer been installed?
Installation drawing
11-40
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
20071018
SHUT OFF VALVE
Brass
CIM 70/BS
DN 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2”

Ø mm 13 19,4 26 32 38,5 50,4
Gram 295 445 615 925 1310 1895
A 55 60 65 75 80 90
B 80 97 108 121,5 142 165,5
C 54 59 66 74 75 86
D 15 16,3 19,1 21,4 21,4 25,7
CH1 27 32,5 40 49,5 55,5 68,5
CH2 22 24 26 32 42 52
CH3 19 21 21 25 25 29
d 8 8 9 10 11 12
Materials - Main Components

Screwed bonnet, non rising stem, solid Threading: Female parallel threads to BS 21
wedge disc Rp - ISO 7/1ºRp; taper threads to BS 21 Rc -
ISO 7/1ºRc; or American NPT threads ANSI
Body, bonet, wedge: hot forged brass Cu B1.20.1 available on request
Zn40 Pd2
Hydrostatic test pressures: Shell 30 bar
Stem and metal components: Machined from (435 psi), Seat 22 bar (315 psi)
extruded brass bar Cu Zn40 Pb2
Lockshield: Pattern available in sizes
Packing: AF/SK (free of asbestos), elastom- 1/2 to 2
ers, syntetic resin and PTFE. It is suitable to
a maximum temperature of 180ºC (356ºF) Cold service: 20 bar at -10ºC to 100ºC
Gland packing: AF 15/MA heat resistant Saturated steam: 9 bar at 180ºC

fibre, (free of abestos), elastomers, synthetic
resin and PTFE. It is suitable to a maximum
temperature of 250ºC (482ºF)
Hand weel: Registered CIM model in gard
duraluminium Al-Si 12, epoxy painted red
RAL 3000, showing on - off .
11-41
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0830-001 Item: 40,540
Rev: 02 Date:
TEST COCK VALVE DN8 20050601
Connect: 1/4 BSP - Brass
11-42
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0832-001 Item: 41,42,440
Rev: 02 Date:
20050601
TEST COCK VALVE DN8
Connect: 1/4 BSP
AISI 316
11-43
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0826-001 Item: 43,517
Rev: 00 Date:
20051011
SHUT OFF VALVE
1/2 Brass
CIM 70/BS
DN 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2”

Ø mm 13 19,4 26 32 38,5 50,4
Gram 295 445 615 925 1310 1895
A 55 60 65 75 80 90
B 80 97 108 121,5 142 165,5
C 54 59 66 74 75 86
D 15 16,3 19,1 21,4 21,4 25,7
CH1 27 32,5 40 49,5 55,5 68,5
CH2 22 24 26 32 42 52
CH3 19 21 21 25 25 29
d 8 8 9 10 11 12

Zn40 Pd2
Packing: AF/SK (free of asbestos), elastom- 1/2 to 2

11-44
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
20091005
SHUT OFF VALVE
3/8 Brass
CIM 70/BS
DN 3/8”
Ø mm 12
Gram 180
A 50
B 71
C 40
D 11
CH1 23
CH2 20
CH3 17
d 7

Zn40 Pd2
Packing: AF/SK (free of asbestos), elastom-
1/2 to 2
11-45
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0823-001 Item: 46,49
Rev: 00 Date:
20120214
CONTROL NEEDLE VALVE
PN400
Connect: 1/4 BSP
Pressure rating
PN 400
Temperature range
Max working temperature +300 °C
Materials
Body Stainless steel 2343
Stem Stainless steel 2343
Stem packing Graphite
Handwheel Steel
Socket
Internal BSP parallel threads.
MEASUREMENTS
Gjennomlop
DN G L H kg
Bore
8 1/4’’ 5 mm 60 85 0.4
11-46
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0624-007 Item: 50
Rev: 00 Date:
DN200 DIN PN10
11-47
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0436-101~111 Item: 64
Rev: 00 Date:
NON RETURN VALVE 20110330
DN100 - DN600 JIS 5K
11-48
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 02 Date:
20060109
NON RETURN VALVE
Connect: tube ø8 OD comp.ends
Non-return Valve
Material: steel
Supplied with 1 bar opening pressure as standard
Type W.P. bar L Bore

RHD 8 L 400 67 6
11-49
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 03 Date:
20070821
NON-RETURN VALVE
RDH 28L
Opening pressure: 1bar The valve insert for nominal width 16 can
be fitted in this position only
Nominal width Tube OD
Pressure loss - Non-return valve -
16 20-28
Measured with hydraulic oil 35mm2/s.
Opening pressure: 0,5 bar
Tube connection both ends
bar Tube kh per 100 L2 L5 I1 S1 S2 S3 Ø out-

OD pcs let
250 (3626) 28 76,5 99 81 66 41 41 18,5
L= approximate length with nuts tight-
ened
11-50
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9280-003 Item: 80
Rev: 02 Date:
20130920
CONTROL VALVE 1 BSP
Adjustment of return pressure OE-

120/150/180/240/300 U/S/US 1
11-51
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9280-003 Item: 80
11-52
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9340-003 Item: 84,903
Rev: 00 Date:
20140519
Flexible oil hose 3/4
Connect: M30 x 2,0
Hose Straight coupling
Technical data
Description Low/medium pressure
hydraulic hose
Approval Type approval
Outside surface Oil resistant synthetic
rubber Connection: M30 x 2.0
Inside surface Nitril rubber
Inside dia 6,3 mm / 3/4”
Outside dia 13,9 mm 90° coupling
Working pressure 225 bar
Burst pressure 900 bar
Bend radius 100 mm
Weight 0,23 kg/m
Working temp -40°C to +100°C
Connection: M30 x 2.0
11-53
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9341-002 Item: 85,904
Rev: 00 Date:
20140519
Flexible oil hose 1/4
Connect: M16 x 1,5
Hose Straight coupling
Technical data
Description Low/medium pressure
hydraulic hose
Approval Type approval
Outside surface Oil resistant synthetic
rubber Connection: M16 x 1.5
Inside surface Nitril rubber
Inside dia 6,3 mm / 1/4”
Outside dia 13,9 mm 90° coupling
Working pressure 225 bar
Burst pressure 900 bar
Bend radius 100 mm
Weight 0,23 kg/m
Working temp -40°C to +100°C
Connection: M16 x 1.5
11-54
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
IGNITION BURNER 20091005
11-55
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
20091005
OIL NOZZLE, IGNITION BURNER
0,6 Gal/h 80° H
Description Dimensions
- Light and heavy oil
- 100% test of capacity and performance in
accordance with EN
- Recommended tightening torque: 15-20 Nm
- Filter: 45µm sintered bronze
- Specified capacity: 2,37kg/h
Spray angle Design
11-56
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Rev: 00 Date:
20091006
IGNITION GLOW PLUG 12V
CONNECTION M14 x 1,25
Technical data
Tightening torque 15 Nm
Fitting depth 42,5 mm
Overall length 62,5 mm
Thread size M14 x 1,25
Spanner size 19 mm
Rated current 20 A
Voltage 12 V
11-57
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N0041-001txt Item: 105,106
Rev: 02 Date:
20050606
RESILIENT MOUNTING
Type RA
User manual
Features Wide load rating options, 40-2100kg.

Corrosion protected to cope with harduous environ-
RA uses the rubber profile in shear and compression obtain- ments on land or marine applications (Fe/Zn 8C as per
ing good vertical flexibility with the advantage of horizontal ISO 2081).
stability. For normal speeds of approx. 1500 rpm the RA type
Stronger base metal withstands high shock loads with-
provides a degree of isolation of 75-85%. For even better iso-
out deformation.
lation, the alternative RAEM or M can be chosen.
Fitted as standard with a shock-proof device (up to 5G)
It s unique construction and the lates production methods with resilient stop, making RA ideal for use on mobile or
make the type RA a high performance mounting having a marine applications.
number of advantages: Clear and durable product marking so that mountings
Rubber features are utilized effectively combining com- can be identified even after several years in operation.
pression and shear. Domed shape cover to protect against oil contamination.
Tight tolerances on dynamic stiffness rate for accurate
vibration calculations.
Art.no. Art.no.
Dimensions in mm Weight M-Max(kg)
Hardness A Hardness B
Type (40º IRH) (60º IRH) D A H K d t G (kg) A(40º IRH) B(60º IRH)
RA 100/M10 1861700 1861710 79 110 30 130 9 2 M10 0.330 95 190
RA 100/M12 2256120 2256130 79 110 30 130 9 2 M12 0.330 95 190
RA 200/M10 1861740 1861750 94 124 35 150 10 2,5 M10 0.470 180 270
RA 200/M12 2255720 1860350 94 124 350 150 10 2,5 M12 0.470 180 270
RA 350/M12 2256370 2256380 101 140-148 38 175 14 3 M12 0.737 250 450
RA 350/M16 1861760 1861770 101 140-148 38 175 14 3 M16 0.737 250 450
RA 500 1861800 1861810 123 158 42 192 14 3 M16 1.020 400 600
RA 800 1861820 1861830 144 182 48 216 14 3 M16 1.589 750 1300
RA 1200 2255360 2255370 161 140 58 170 14 3 M20 2.188 900 1600
RA 1800 2255380 2255390 181 160 66.5 190 14 3 M20 2.325 1300 2100
11-58
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N0041-001txt Item: 105,106
Application Converters
Pumps
For the effective isolation of vibration and noise on different
Industial and marine gen sets
machines with rotating movements, like:
Fans
Compressors Also suitable for use with presses, punches and other
Combustion engines workshop machines.
Generators
11-59
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9339-001 Item: 107
Rev: 00 Date:
20071203
FLEXIBLE BELLOW
DN350
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
General description EPDM rubber with reinforcement layers
Application Elastomeric expansion joints
DESIGN / COMPOSITION
EPDM OUTSIDE NOTES:
Hardness 65 Shore A +/- 5
Polyester fabric 54 g/m 2
Mesh opening: 1,5 - 2mm
EPDM Mesh thickness: 0,3-0,6mm
EPDM is pure EPDM Terpolymere from ethylen/
Polyester fabric 54 g/m 2
Propylen
EPDM INSIDE
PROPERTIES
Nom. value Tolerance According to / Note
Weight g/m2 4800 -5%+30%
Thickness mm 4 -10%+30%
Tensile strength N/50mm Warp 1400 Typical ISO 1421
Weft 1400 (*see note below)
Elongation % 10 Typical ISO 1421
Tear Strenght N Warp 330 Typical ISO 4674
Weft 275
Adhesion Strenght N - ISO 36
Working Temp. °C 120
Peak Temp. °C 170 48 hrs acc.
Working Pressure kPa 33 at 120 °C

Peak Pressure kPa 50 at 120 °C in 5 hours
11-60
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9339-001 Item: 107
PROPERTIES
Pressure tightness kPa 50
RESISTANCE
A: Little or no effect B:Minor or moderate effect C:Significant or severe effect -: unsuitable
Abrasion B NOTES:
Fire C Suitable for wet and dry chemical
service, but reservation for expo-
Weather C sure to oils, hydrocarbons and
Acid B conc. mineral acid.
* Tensile strengths values are those
Solvents B
values, where durable damage of
Polyester reinforcement layer has
occured.
11-61
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0563-101-117 Item: 108
Rev: 00 Date:
FLEXIBLE BELLOW 20111010
DN25-DN600 JIS 5K
11-62
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0451-011 Item: 130
Rev: 00 Date:
WET FILTER FOR SCRUBBER 20140519
2792 x 900 x 200
11-63
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0450-011 Item: 131
Rev: 00 Date:
DEMISTER FOR SCRUBBER 20140519
2792 x 1970 x 150
11-64
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0074-001~005 Item: 138,139
Rev: 00 Date:
BALL VALVE ASSEMBLY 20120306
DN15 - DN50
11-65
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0074-101 Item: 150
Rev: 00 Date:
BALL VALVE 20090903
DN15 DIN PN10
11-66
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8087-001 Item: 151
Rev: 01 Date:
BALL VALVE ASSEMBLY 20070927
DN15 CLOSED F180
11-67
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N3296-002 Item: 152,157
Rev: 02 Date:
20070824
SOLENOID VALVE
2/2-way NC air
Direct operated 1/4

NC
FEATURES MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH FLUID

Solenoid valves comply with all applicable Body Brass
EC Directives
Internal parts, spring Stainless steel
Compact and low weight valve enabling easy
installation Seat Brass
Epoxy moulded coil for general service appli- Sealings NBR

cations
Shading coil Copper
Coils interchangeable without dismantling
the valve ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
GENERAL Coil insulation class F
Differential pressure = 15 bar Connector Spade plug (pg 11P)
Maximum viscosity = 40 cSt (mm2/s) Connector specification ISO 4400
Electrical safety VDE 0580

Response time = 8 - 20 ms (with air DP = 6 bar)
Voltage DC (=): 24V
Temperature
Fluids Sealings
range (TS) Ambient temperature
range (TS) (oC)
water, air, inert gas, -25°C to +80°C NBR (nitrile / buna-n)
oil
-25o to +60 o
SPESIFICATIONS
Operating pressure differential (bar)
Pipe Orifice Flow coefficient Kv
Coil Type number
size size maximum (PS)
type (Brass)
(G) (mm) min.
(m3/h) (l/min) air water oil
1/4 2,7 0,22 3,6 0 15 15 15 CMXX- SC E272A017 MS

FT
11-68
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N3296-002 Item: 152,157
INSTALLATION Pipe connections (G*) have standard combi-
nation thread according to ISO 228/1 and
The valves can be mounted in any position ISO 7/1
without affecting operation Spare Parts Kits and replacement coils are
Valves have 2 mounting holes in the body available
Dimensions (mm), Weight (kg)
Weight
Coil type A B C D
brass
CMXX-FT 85 64 45 84 0,510
1. Screwdriver manual operator (suffix MS)
2. Connector rotatable by 90 increaments (Pg 11P)
3. Mounting: Two M4, depth 6
* +15 mm for connector removal
** +41 mm for coil removal
11-69
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0073-001~005 Item: 153
Rev: 00 Date:
BALL VALVE 20090602
DN15-DN50 OPEN
11-70
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0072-003 Item: 156
Rev: 00 Date:
BALL VALVE 20090903
DN25 CLOSED
11-71
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N3297-003 Item: 158
Rev: 02 Date:
20070824
SOLENOID VALVE
2/2-way NC oil
Direct operated 1/4

NC
FEATURES MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH FLUID

Solenoid valves comply with all applicable Body AISI316L
EC Directives
Internal parts, spring Stainless steel
Compact and low weight valve enabling easy
installation Seat Stainless steel
Epoxy moulded coil for general service appli- Sealings NBR

cations
Shading coil Copper
Coils interchangeable without dismantling
the valve ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
GENERAL Coil insulation class F
Differential pressure = 40 bar Connector Spade plug (pg 11P)
Maximum viscosity = 40 cSt (mm2/s) Connector specification ISO 4400
Electrical safety VDE 0580

Response time = 8 - 20 ms (with air DP = 6 bar)
Voltage DC (=): 24V
Temperature
Fluids Sealings
range (TS) Ambient
temperature
water, air, inert gas, -25°C to +80°C NBR (nitrile / buna-n) range (TS) -25o to + 60o
oil
(oC)
SPESIFICATIONS
Operating pressure differential (bar)
Pipe Orifice Flow coefficient Kv
Type number
size size maximum (PS) Coil type
(Stainless)
(G) (mm) min.
(m3/h) (l/min) air water oil
1/4 2,0 0,11 1,8 0 40 40 40 CMXX-FT SC E272A046 MS
11-72
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N3297-003 Item: 158
INSTALLATION Pipe connections (G*) have standard combi-
nation thread according to ISO 228/1 and
The valves can be mounted in any position ISO 7/1
without affecting operation Spare Parts Kits and replacement coils are
Valves have 2 mounting holes in the body available
Dimensions (mm), Weight (kg)
1. 2 mounting holes Ø M4, depth 6 mm.
2. Manual operator location.
11-73
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0117-004 Item: 159,164,167,462,465
Rev: 00 Date:
20120306
PRESSURE GAUGE
Type 01.18.3.A - ø100
Range 0 - 4bar
01.18.3.A - ø100 Liquid filled Range:

Type A: 0 - 4bar; 0 - 400kPa
Stem mounting;
Connection:
lower connection
1/4 BSP
DS a b c d d1 F L ch h
100 13 48,5 15 110,6 101 1/4 BSP 20 14 x 9 86
11-74
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0121-010 Item: 160
Rev: 00 Date:
20120306
PRESSURE GAUGE
Type 01.10.3.A - ø100
Range 0 - 10bar

Type A: 0 - 10bar; 0 - 1MPa
Stem mounting;
Connection:
lower connection
1/4 BSP
100 13 48,5 15 110,6 101 1/4 BSP 20 14 x 8 86
11-75
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0115-005 Item: 161,163,168,464,561
Rev: 00 Date:
20120306
PRESSURE GAUGE
Type 01.18.3.A - ø100
Range 0 - 1bar

Type A: 0 - 1bar; 0 - 100kPa
Stem mounting;
Connection:
lower connection
1/4 BSP
100 13 48,5 15 110,6 101 1/4 BSP 20 14 x 9 86
11-76
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0116-002 Item: 162
Rev: 00 Date:
20120306
PRESSURE GAUGE
Type 01.18.3.A - ø100
Range 0 - 2,5bar

Type A: 0 - 2,5bar; 0 - 250kPa
Stem mounting;
Connection:
lower connection
1/4 BSP
100 13 48,5 15 110,6 101 1/4 BSP 20 14 x 9 86
11-77
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0119-005 Item: 165,166
Rev: 00 Date:
20120306
PRESSURE GAUGE
Type 01.18.3.A - ø100
Range 0 - 40bar

Type A: 0 - 40bar; 0 - 4MPa
Stem mounting;
Connection:
lower connection
1/4 BSP
100 13 48,5 15 110,6 101 1/4 BSP 20 14 x 9 86
11-78
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0124-001 Item: 175, 179
Rev: 01 Date:
20050527
THERMOMETER
Range: 0-100ºC
Connect: 1/2 BSP
11-79
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0170-001 Item: 178, 180,188
Rev: 01 Date:
20050601
PT100 - TEMP. TRANSMITTER
L=100mm, 0-100ºC, 4-20mA
1/2 BSP
Constructed basicly according to DIN43763 form Process entry

B. Improved to ensure short response time and
reliable measurement. Heat transfer conducted Male process entry thread G 1/2 , AISI316/316L.
through metal all the way from the protection
tube to the Pt 100 detector which eliminates the Cable entry
need for conduction compounds. Pt 100 detector
built into ø6mm insert tube attached to standard Weatherproof heavy duty die cast alloy screw
terminal block to enable replacemant. Four wire top head type CE.
attachment from detector leads to terminal block.
Insert
Specification
Replaceable, max ø6mm. Ceramic terminal
Protection tube
block with spring loaded mounting screws alter-
nately transmitter. Insert length according to DIN
Seamless tube ø10 x 1mm, AISI 316/316L.
43762 or ordering code. Max tip temperature
Closed end is bushed with bore for ø6mm
normally 250ºC.
measuring insert. Short neck by the use of
through protection tube.
A Pt 100 detector C Max. temp. H Terminal head O El. connection L Probe length Insert length
Screw top CE, G 1/2 Transmitter

DIN class B 250ºC 100mm 175mm
Neck length less 4mm Specified separately
11-80
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M1623-004~011 Item: 182~185,212-214
Rev: 00 Date:
20100428
Pressure Transmitter
Introduction Technical data

Designed for use in severe maritime environ-
ments Accuracy ±0.5% FS (typ.)
±1% FS (max.)
All relevant marine approvals
Response time < 4 ms
Enclosure an wetted parts of acid-resistant
stainless steel (AISI 316L) Output signal 4 to 20 mA
Pressure ranges in relative (gauge) Supply voltage 9 to 32 V dc
Standard output signal: 4-20 mA
Current limitation 28 mA
Temperature compensated and laser cali-
Medium/Ambient temp range -40 - +85°C
brated
The pressure transmitter is designed for use in Recommended torque 30-35 Nm
almost all marine applications. Enclosure IP 65
Excellent vibration stability, robust construction,
and high degree of EMC/EMI protection equip Weight 0,2 kg
the pressure transmitter to meet the most strin-
gent industrial requirements. Dimensions
Pressure ranges
Article no. Scale Connection El. conn.
M1623-004 0-1 barg 1/4 A PG 11

M1623-005 0-2,5 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-006 0-4 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-007 0-6 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-008 0-10 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-009 0-16 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-010 0-25 barg 1/4 A PG 11
M1623-011 0-40 barg 1/4 A PG 11
11-81
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0181-001 Item: 191,193
Rev: 01 Date:
20050601
LEVEL SWITCH
Type 003S
User manual
003 Integral sensor wall to avoid forming air pockets or sludge traps.
A threaded boss is recommended for pressu-
Self contained liquid level alarm
rised applications. Refer to Installation leaflet for
No moving parts full details.
European Directive compliance
Description
Features
Manufactured in Polyphenylene Sulphide (PPS)
Relay or solid-state output for corrosion resistance in most liquids, the 003
Corrosion resistant PPS construction range of sensors can be mounted in any position
in a tank using either a 1 or 3/4 thread available
or 3/4 threaded mounting in BSPP, BSPT and NPT thread forms. A thread
Small in-tank dimensions is provided on each side of a hexagonal boss to
allow either external or internal / pole mounting
24V ac or dc powered
of the sensor. Comprising a one piece moulded
Lightweight body with an integral pcb, the 003 switch is fac-
tory sealed and supplied with a 3m flying lead for
Typical Applications
customer connection. The 003 switch is
Low level alarms in header tanks designed for high or low level alarm duties to
Pump control duty in feeder tanks give a voltage free contact or solid state transis-
tor output for alarm signalling or as part of a
High and low alarms in storage tanks pump control system.
Level and pump control in storage tanks
Small or thin wall tanks
Operation
The moulded body contains two piezo-electric
Installation crystals, one each side of a gap at the tip of the
The 003 sensor may be mounted at any angle in sensor. An ultrasonic signal is transmitted from
the vessel, although care should be taken to one crystal into the gap, but if there is air or gas
ensure that the liquid is free to drain out of the in the sensor gap then the signal is not received
sensor gap. Position the sensor away from entry by the other crystal. However, if there is a liquid
or exit points to avoid areas of excessive turbu- present, the signal will be transmitted and the
lence or aeration, and avoid installation in the integral electronics will switch the output circuitry
direct flow of liquid. Ensure a clearance of at to signal the presence of a liquid.
least 25mm from all sensor surfaces to vessel
11-82
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0181-001 Item: 191,193
Technical specification
003S* models
Operating pressure 20 bar
Operating temperature -20°C to + 70°C
Ambient temperature As operating temp.
Minimum S. G. 0.50
Max. viscosity 5000cSt. at 20°C
Switching response 50ms dry-wet
0.5s wet-dry
Hysteresis < 4mm
Repeatability +/- 2mm
Overall length 110mm
Length into tank 79mm (External mount)
Body diameter 22mm
Switching function SPCO relay(energised wet)
Maximum switched current 1A at 30v res. 0.25A at 30v ind.
Maximum switched voltage 30v
Power supply 18-30v dc or ac
Dry current drawn 10mA nom.
Wet current drawn 25mA max.
Cable length 3m: 5 core 7/0.2mm
Cable sheathing PVC
IP rating of sensor IP66/IP68 (3m)
Not suitable for use in intrinsically safe circuits. Not suitable for the direct starting of large motors.
11-83
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0086-001 Item: 200
Rev: 02 Date:
BURNER FLAME 20061207
Flame Scanner complete
11-84
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0086-001 Item: 200
Description of flame amplifier PR 2271 R2B2
The flame amplifier is built up around a microporcessor core. The input is sensitive to variations of resist-
ance in the photo-resistor (LDS) caused by variations in the flame brightness. Range of variations: 0 -
10kW
Power supply is 24V DC plus/minus 20%.
The electrical circuit operates a relay, rating max. load at 24V DC: 1A.
A red LED in front is lit when the amplifier is registering a flame.
An information for flame scanner amplifier adjustment

The flame scanner consists of a photo-resistor where the resistance is depending upon the amount of
visible light that hits the photo-resistor.
The flame amplifier is an electronic amplifier that amplifies the varying current through the photo-resistor,
caused by changes in the flame brightness when the generator is running.
The flame amplifier is fitted with a potentiometer screw in the front for set point adjustment.
To adjust the sensitivity to a correct level, this procedure has to be followed:
1. Adjust the controller by turning the potmeter clockwise until the LED is lit.
2. From the point the LED is lit, turn the potmeter slowly counter clockwise turning off the LED (limit
for max. operation sensitivity).
In case of trouble:
- a) Clean the glas inside the sight glases.

- b) Test the function using a flash light directly towards the flame scanner. The LED should be lit.
11-85
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0135-001 Item: 203
Rev: 00 Date:
20080129
FILTER COMPLETE
1/4 BSP
Dimensions
11-86
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0135-001 Item: 203
Technical Data
Filter head PVDF
Filter Bowl Glas
Seal Viton
Temperature max. 100 oC
Pressure max. 4 bar
Application in explosive atmosphere
(additional indications):
The equipment corresponds to the essential

requirements of the European Directive 94/9/EC.
Therefore it can be used in explosive
atmosphere (Zone 1; Group IIB).
Depending on the filter element used,

inflammable gases and flammable gases (only
temporary explosive in normal operation, Zone
1; Group IIB or IIC) can be introduced through
this gas filters.
Spare parts
Filter insert 5 pcs, Item No. M0130-001
Glas cover w/o-ring, Item No. M4496-000002
11-87
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0094-003 Item: 209
Rev: 00 Date:
Ignition Transfoemer 20090604
260VA, 230-250V
11-88
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0171-001 Item: 219,498
Rev: 01 Date:
20050601
L=250mm, 0-100ºC, 4-20mA
Connect: 1/2 BSP
Constructed basicly according to DIN43763 form Process entry

B. Improved to ensure short response time and
reliable measurement. Heat transfer conducted Male process entry thread G 1/2 , AISI316/316L.
through metal all the way from the protection
tube to the Pt 100 detector which eliminates the Cable entry
need for conduction compounds. Pt 100 detector
built into ø6mm insert tube attached to standard Weatherproof heavy duty die cast alloy screw
terminal block to enable replacemant. Four wire top head type CE.
Insert
Specification
Replaceable, max ø6mm. Ceramic terminal
Protection tube
block with spring loaded mounting screws alter-
nately transmitter. Insert length according to DIN
43762 or ordering code. Max tip temperature
normally 250ºC.
measuring insert. Short neck by the use of
through protection tube.
A Pt 100 detector C Max. temp. H Terminal head O El. connection L Probe length Insert length
Screw top CE, G 1/2 Transmitter

DIN class B 250ºC 250mm 325mm
Neck length less 4mm Specified separately
11-89
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0383-001~006 Item: 229
Rev: 01 Date:
20130913
FUEL OIL PUMP UNIT
AFI-Twin unit
The fuel oil pump unit consists of two

pumps with filters and change over valve
for selecting the pump to use.
Common internal pressure relief valve

and gauges for both suction and pres-
sure side are standard. It is possible to
maintain or change one pump unit with
filter while the other pump is running
Vertical filter installation permits filter

exchange without draining and the
inside-out flow keeps particles of dirt
inside the filter. Integrated magnet keeps
metal chips on the floor of the filter.
The installed three spindle pumps

requires little space and the specially
shaped thread flanks produce virtually
pulsation-free, low noise pumping
action.
11-90
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0383-001~006 Item: 229
11-91
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0190-001 Item: 249
Rev: 01 Date:
ALARM SIRENE 20050601
Type: 172.24
11-92
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M1833-005 Item: 262
Rev: 00 Date:
20111009
REDUCTION VALVE
w/filter 1/2
G1/2 , 0.5-10 bar, 5 m filter
Working Adujstment
Port Qn pressure range Condensate drain Weight
min./max. min./max.
[I/min] [bar] [bar] [kg]
G 1/2 430 1.5/16 0.5/10 fully automatic,open without 0.635

pressure
Reservoir:Polycarbonate
Protective guard:Polyamide
Nominal flow Qn at 6.3 bar and p= 1 bar.
11-93
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M1833-005 Item: 262
Fully automatic condensate drain
A1 A2 A3 A7 B C D E1 G H1 H2 H3 H4
G 1/2 G 1/3 G 1/4 G 1/8 63 74 80 63.5 M42X1.5 -- 206 -- --
A1 L1 L2 M
G 1/2 41 60 42.5
11-94
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M1833-005 Item: 262
Block assembly kit
A1 A B C1 C2 D E F G H I J K L
G 1/2 120 75 54 54 8 42 6.4 7 20 8 102.5 30 M5x68
M N Material Weight [kg]

23,1x1,78 72 Due cast zinc 0.825
Scope delivery incl. 4 mounting screws M5x68-4.8-A2R according to EN ISO 7046-1(countersunk screw with type
H X-slot),2x O-ring
Safety well as knowledge of the respective technical terms.

In order to ensure operational safety, these tasks may
The product has been manufactured according to the only be carried out by qualified personnel or an
accepted rules of current technology. Even so, there instructed person under the direction of qualified per-
is a risk of injury or damage if the following general sonnel.
safety instructions and the specific warnings given in Qualified personnel are those who can recognize
these instructions are not observed. possible hazards and institute the appropriate safety
Read these instructions completely before working measures, due to their professional training, knowl-
with the product. edge, and experience, as well as their understanding
Keep these instructions in a location where they are of the relevant conditions pertaining to the work to be
accessible to all users at all times. done. Qualified personnel must observe the rules rel-
Always include the operating instructions when you evant to the subject area.
pass the product on to third parties.
General safety instructions
Intended use
Observe the valid local regulations to protect the
The product is exclusively intended for installation in environment in the country of use and to avoid work-
a machine or system or combination with other com- place accidents.
ponents to form a machine or system. The product Only use Rexroth products that are in perfect work-
may only be commissioned after it has been installed ing order.
in the machine/system for which it is intended. Examine the product for obvious defects, such as
Use is permitted only under the operating conditions cracks in the housing or missing
and within the performance limits listed in the techni- screws, caps, or seals.
cal data. Only use compressed air as the medium. Do not modify or convert the product.
The product is technical equipment and is intended
for professional use only. Persons assembling, operating, disassembling or
Intended use includes having completely read and maintaining Rexroth products may not be under the
understood these instructions. influence of alcohol, other drugs, or medications that
Personnel qualifications influence their ability to respond.
The warranty will not apply if the system is incor-
All tasks associated with the products require basic rectly assembled.
mechanical, electrical, and pneumatic knowledge, as
11-95
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M1833-005 Item: 262
Do not place any improper mechanical loads on the Changing the filter element
product under any circumstances.
Product warnings and information must be legible,
i.e. not covered by paint, etc. Safety instructions
related to the product and technology
Lay the cables and lines so that they are not dam-
aged and no one can trip over them.
Do not operate the product in aggressive ambient
air (i.e. solvent gases).
Product warnings and information must be legible,
i.e. not covered by paint, etc.
Safety instructions related to the Filters become contaminated with use and must be
product and technology changed regularly, at the latest after one year. This,
however, is only a recommendation, since the interval
Lay the cables and lines so that they are not dam- depends on the quality of the compressed air and the
aged and no one can trip over them. amount of air throughput.
Do not operate the product in aggressive ambient
air (i.e. solvent gases).
Fully automatic condensate drain

"Normally open" configuration
In the "normally open" configuration, the condensate
drain closes at a pressure > 1.5 bar and opens at an
operating pressure < 1.5 bar. The valve opens auto-
matically as soon as the floater reaches the highest
point and closes again when the floater reaches the
lowest point.
Setting the automatic mode:
Turn drain screw to right as far as it will go. You may
leave the screw one turn deep in the thread or
remove it completely
Service and Repairs

Cleaning and servicing
Seal all openings with suitable protective caps to
prevent detergents from penetrating the system.
Never use solvents or strong detergents. Only clean
the product using a slightly damp cloth. Only use
water to do this and, if necessary, a mild detergent.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners for cleaning.
Do not use compressed air for cleaning (blowing off)
maintenance units or maintenance devices. Changing the reservoir/filter element
11-96
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0219-003 Item: 280
Rev: 00 Date:
20120119
Averaging Pitot Tube
The averaging pitot tube is the primary element Installation

in liquid, gas or steam flow measurement - Disassemble the probe from the mounting kit.
according to the fluid dynamic pressure principle. - Drill a hole Ø 31mm in the pipe.
- Tag weld the mounting kit to the pipe observing
The fluid must be in one phase and the pipe shall that:
run full in the measuring section.
a) The distance from the outside of pipe to
The averaging pitot tube shall be fitted in a
flange facing is 128mm.
straight cylindrical pipe of constant cross-sec-
b) The centre line of the mounting kit is square
tional area without any obstructions.
to the pipe axis.
The required minimum straight length of the pipe - Final welding into the pipeline is done with an
varies according to the nature of the obstruction approved method of welding and if necessary
- bends, reducers etc. heat treatment must be used.
From the table below it can be seen how many - Assemble the unit with the gasket, bolts and nuts
times the inner pipe diameter D is required: supplied with the unit.
- Please observe that the flow in the pipe line
Upstream Downstream flows in the same direction as indicated by
Pitobar Pitobar the pointer on the unit.
Single 90° bend 9 3
two or more 90° bends in 14 3 The bottom support is welded to the pipe opposite
the same plane the mounting kit in the same manner as the
mounting kit. It is advisable for bigger pipes to
two or more 90° bends in 24 4
use the probe to centre the bottom support when
different planes
tag welding is performed.
Reducer 2D to D over a 8 3
length of 1D to 2D
In a horizontal pipe the pressure taps shall be in
Expander 0,5D to D over 8 3 the horizontal pipe axis or even better above.
a length of 1D to 2D
globe valve fully open 24 4 Maintenance
The pitot tube requires no special maintenance.
Is above length of straight pipe not possible, the
If the pitot tube is removed from the pipe line it
accuracy will decrease especially in the low flow
ranges. The repeated accuracy will not be affect- may be mechanically cleaned in- and outside or
ed notably. with air pressure only.
The inside surface of the measuring pipe shall be

clean, free from pitting and deposit for at least a
length of 5D upstream and 2D downstream.
11-97
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0219-003 Item: 280
11-98
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M7910-003 Item: 420
Rev: 01 Date:
20080409
FLOW INDICATOR DN 50
DIN PN 10/16
Sight glass in cast iron

Double window with fixed vanes.
PN 16, fl.PN 16, DIN 3202/F1
DN L S D Kg Cast iron
50 230 60 165 9,0
11-99
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0156-001 Item: 421
Rev: 01 Date:
20070903
SHUT OFF VALVE DN15
Connect: 1/2 BSP
Parts Name Material Features

Body ASTM A351-CF8M The thread ends conform to
End cap ASTM A351-CF8M ASME B1.20.1 (NTP)
Ball ASTM A351-CF8M DIN 2999 & BS 21
ISO 228/1 & ISO 7/1
Stem AISI 316
Handle AISI 304 Investment casting
Gland nut AISI 304 Blow-out proof stem
Nut & washer AISI 304 Full bore
Ball seat R-PTFE 1000 psi W.O.G.
Body seal PTFE
15 % glassfiber fill PTFE
Stem packing PTFE reinforce seat
Thrust washer PTFE
PTFE seal & packing
Handle sleeve VINYL
Latch lock handle (option)
Mounting pad refers from DIN 3337 &
ISO 5211
Size øD L H W øP M Cv
1/2 15 66 49 115 36 M5 10
* All dimensions are in millimeter (mm).

* Cv is defined as the flow in GPM that a valve
will carry with a pressure drop of 1 psi when liq-
uid is water at 60°F
11-100
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8209-004 Item: 422
Rev: 00 Date:
20071022
BALANCING VALVE DN80
Type STAF DN150
Technical description AMETAL® is the dezincification resistant alloy of

TA.
STAF Heating and cooling systems
Surface treatment:
Functions:
Epoxy painting
Balancing
Pre-setting Face to face dimensions:
Measuring ISO 5752 series 1, BS 2080
Shut-off (The balancing cone for valve DN
Measuring points
65-300 is pressure released).
Measuring points are self-sealed. Remove the
Pressure class: PN 16
cap and insert the probe through the seal.
Temperature:
Max. working temperature: 120oC Bolted bonnet
For higher temperatures (max. 150oC), please PN 16, ISO 7005-2
contact closest sales office.
Min. working temperature: -10oC
Material:
Body: Cast iron EN-GJL-250 (GG25)
Bonnet, restriction cone and spindle of AMET-

AL®
Seat seal: Cone with EPDM ring
Bonnet bolts: Chromed steel
Digital handwheel: Fitted with a red Polyamide

plastic handwheel.
Number of bolt
TA No DN L H D B Kvs Kg
holes
52 181-092 150 8 480 285 285 24 420 42.4
Kvs=m3/h at a pressure drop of 1 bar and fully
open valve.
11-101
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8209-004 Item: 422
Setting
It is possible to read the set value on the hand-
wheel. The number of turns between the fully
open and closed position is 8 turns.
Initial setting of a valve for a particular pressure

drop, e g corresponding to 2.3 turns on the
graph, is carried out as follows:
1. Close the valve fully.

2. Open the valve to 2.3 turns.
Correction factors
3. Using a Allen key, turn the inner spindle
clockwise until stop. The flow calculations are valid for water (+20°C).
For other liquids with approx. the same viscosity
4. The valve is set. as water (<=20 cSt = 3°E=100S.U.), it is only
To check the setting of a valve, first close the necessary to compensate for the spesific densi-
valve, the open it to the stop position; the indica- ty. However, at low temperatures, the viscosity
tor then shows the presetting number, in this increases and laminar flow may occur in the
case 2.3. valves. This causes a flow deviation that increas-
es with small valves, low settings and low differ-
Measuring accuracy ential pressures. Correction for this deviation can
be made with the software TA select or direct in
The handwheel zero position is calibrated and TA-CBI.
must not be changed.
Sizing
Deviation of flow at different settings
When p and the design flow are known, use the
The curve holds for valves with normal pipe fit-
formula to calculate the Kv-value or use the dia-
tings. The valve can be installed with the oppo-
gram.
site flow direction. The specified flow details are
also valid for this direction, although tolerances
can be greater (max 5% more).
Try also to avoid mounting valves, restricting

devices and pumps immediately before the
valve.
Support material
Software
TA Select: Makes it easy to choose the right
balancing valves by taking into account the
desired flow, pressure drop and flow rate.
Measuring instruments
Use the TA-CBI electronic instrument. It is pro-
grammed with valve characteristics for TA
11-102
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8209-004 Item: 422
valves, enabling measured differential pressure Conversion disc
to be read off directly as a flow rate. By using the conversion disc it is easy to calcu-
late the relationship between flow, pressure and
setting values for all valve sizes.
Kv values DN 150
Turns 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6 6,5 7 7,5 8
Kv values 6,5 12 22 40 65 100 135 169 207 242 279 312 340 367 391 420
Diagram 65-150
*) Recommended area
**) 25 db(A)
***) 35 db(A)
11-103
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0818-001 Item: 427
Rev: 01 Date:
20080502
SHUT OFF/ NON RETURN
VALVE
1/2 BSP PN16
Materials
1. Body Gunmetal LG2
2. Disc Gunmetal LG2
3. Bonnet Gunmetal LG2
4. Lock nut Brass SM 2065
5. Stem Brass SM 2065 (For hot
sea water services,
CuSn8 is recommended)
6. Gland Brass SM 2065
7. Gland nut Brass SM 2065
8. Hand wheel Cast iron
Features
Screw down non-return globe valve, straight
pattern, with flat seat tightness. Adjustable gland
packing. Threaded bonnet with locking nut.
Range of applications
Sea water, water and low pressure steam.
MEASUREMENTS
Max. work. pressure

bar/MAWP
DN D L H Max R Kv Kg
o o
100 C 225 C
15 1/2 65 95 65 5 16 11 0,5
11-104
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0563-001-017 Item: 466
Rev: 00 Date:
DN25-DN600 DIN PN 10
11-105
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0563-401-417 Item: 467
Rev: 01 Date:
DN25-DN600 DIN PN10/JIS 5K
11-106
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
Rev: 01 Date:
20090306
SENSOR CENTRAL
FOR GAS SENSORS
Key features Technical Data

Microprocessor controlled unit with four Indications:
channels
LED (power): Power on, green
Three independent alarm thresholds per
LED (channel): Power/Active and three
channel alarm levels
Independent Channel LED status indication Inputs: 4 inputs for 0...5VDC
Four alarm relays with 230 volt rated SPDT Alarm levels: 3 levels per channel, free
contacts adjustable for A, B or C-
alarm within 0,5V...4,8V
Failsafe relay operation on loss of power
Hysteres alarm level: +- ca 100mV
Selectable alarm time delay
Outputs (relays): 4 potential free contacts,
Manual/auto alarm reset for each channel SPDT, rated 230V AC /
5amps.
Built-in service mode and self-test program
summary alarm A, B, C-alarm and fault
Audible alarm alarm
24V DC/150mA output for external flash Max 230V / 5A
light/siren Output (voltage): 24V DC / 150mA
General Power: 230V AC, 50/60 Hz / 24

VDC
This unit offers a simple and effective method of (via battery back-up)
detection for a range of toxic and explosive Power consumption: max 10VA
gases together with refrigerants.
Ambient temperature: 0 °C till +50 °C
This unit is ideally suited to applications where Humidity: 10 till 95% Rh
the presence of contaminant gases can be either (non condensing)
detrimental to health or potentially explosive. Material: ABC/PC
The unit has LED status indication in front.
Enclosure: IP66
Standards and regulations Cable glands: 12 x M16

Dimensions: 180 x 255 x 60mm
Check local standards and regulations as
hygienic max values etc. Weight: 1,15 kg
The unit can be set to Manual of Automatic alarm

Be sure wiring is done according to local reset.
electrical code requirements.
11-107
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
Operation initiated. This sequentially energises each LED
and relay at five second intervals.
After connecting each sensor and applying
power, the green LED on each channel will flash
as the pre-heat process commences.
Service Mode
Depressing the Reset/Test/Service -button for
After approximately 4 minutes the green LED will 10 seconds will inhibit all alarm functions for the
be illuminated permanently and the sensor is chosen channel for a period of 60 minutes.
fully operational.
Whilst in this mode a second 60 minute inhibit
Each channel has one yellow and two red period can be initiated by repeating the process.
warning LED s. The yellow LED indicates a low-
level gas leak (above alarm threshold C) whilst Normal operation will be automatically resumed
the two red LED s indicate gas concentrations after 60 minutes or can be cancelled by
above thresholds B and A. depressing the Reset/Test/Service -button
briefly. Whilst in service function mode all LED s
When gas is detected above the respective will flash.
alarm threshold the appropriate LED s will flash
until the appropriate time delay has expired Fault Mode
when it is permanently illuminated and the
In the event of a sensor failure or disconnection
corresponding relay contacts change state.
of the interconnecting wiring a fault condition will
be indicated by loss of the respective green
As the gas concentration subsides the LED s
Active LED and de-energising alarm relay D. In
and relays will return to their normal state unless
the event of power failure all relays (A, B, C & D)
the manual reset function has been selected.
will be de-energised.
The audible alarm will be initiated if it is config-
ured with the respective alarm threshold and can
A 4-hour delay can be configured for relay D to
not be muted. Technicians can however override
prevent nuisance alarms. This is activated by
alarms off by selecting Service Mode .
setting DIP switch 4 on the respective channel
car to ON .
Auto/Manual Alarm Reset
DIP switch 3 on each channel s control card The operation of the LED s will remain
manages the alarm reset function. ON enables unchanged.
Auto reset and OFF enables Manual reset.
Internal buzzer and 24VDC auxiliary
Alarm Time Delay output
DIP-switches 1 and 2 control the alarm time The internal buzzer can be activated by the DIP-
delay for each channel. swithces on the terminal board and can be user
configured to operate from alarm concentration
Switch 1 Switch 2 A (DIP1), B (DIP2) or C (DIP3).
on on No alarm delay
Setting the DIP-switch to ON for the respective
off on 1 minute delay
alarm level, (see wiring diagram) selects the
on off 10 minute delay appropriate alarm level.
off off 30 minute delay
By removing jumper Bb the buzzer will not
Reset/Test/Service-button operate. The 24VDC auxiliary alarm output is
activated independently of the internal buzzer
Reset/Test/Service-functions are accessible via selection.
a pushbutton on the cover.
Test Mode
By depressing the Reset/Test/Service -button
on any channel for 5 seconds the test program is
11-108
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
NOTE!After being powered off for prolonged Standard alarm settings are based on Health
periods the sensor may take several minutes to and Safety guidelines for toxic gases and at
stabilise during which time false alarms may be concentrations no greater than 20% of the lower
initiated. Any false alarms will automatically explosive level (LEL) for potentially explosive
reset. gases. For refrigerant alarm thresholds are set
according to appropriate standards for
Remote Detectors refrigeration plants.
Different gases and sensor housings may be
used in conjunction with the Multi-Point
Maintenance
Monitoring System. The system should be tested on a twice annual
basis using a test gas.
Gas measurement is conducted by a sensing
element located in the remote housing, which is
hard-wired back to the main panel. The remote
housings are available in a number of different
options to suit the application and environment.
NOTE!Care should be taken when installing the

equipment to minimize any cross contamination
from other gases or vapours.
Installation
Correct location of the detector is essential to
ensure optimum operation of the system. Special
consideration must be given to air movement
and whether the gas to be detected is heavier or
lighter than air. For gases heavier than air (e.g.
Refrigerants (HFC) the sensor should ideally be
located approximately 20cm above floor level
and for gases lighter than air (e.g. Ammonia,
methane) the sensor should be located close to
ceiling level or the highest point within the room.
Connect the detector according to the wiring

diagram.
NOTE!For unused channels a>100 kohms

resistor must be installed between (+) and (S) to
prevent open sensor alarms. Otherwise will the
channel indicate a fault alarm. When changing or
eplacing a detector a new calibration must be
performed.
Alarm Levels
The unit is normally supplied with default set
alarm thresholds. These must be verified or reset
during commissioning.
Multiple gases and alarm set-points can be

accomodated on a single unit as each channel is
totally independent.
11-109
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
Logical matrix
Logical operations of LED’s and relays
Fault Fault
Power Pre Service Alarm C U= Alarm B
Normal Alarm A U>A U<0,1 U<0,1
off heat Mode (>C,<B) U=(>B,<A)
V V
T<Xmin,X=delay in T< T> T< T> T< T> T=<4 T=>4
minutes. Letter U=signal Xmin Xmin XMin Xmin Xmin Xmin (h) (h)
from sensor (Vdc)
LEDs (terminal board)
Power 0 x x x x x x x x x x x
Buzzer (disabled via no indication
jumper)
LEDs (per channe)l

Power/active 0 Flash X Flash X X X X X X 0 0
Alarm C (low level) (Vdc) 0 0 0 Flash Flash X X X X X Flash 0
Alarm B (middle level) 0 0 0 Flash 0 0 Flash X X X Flash X
(Vdc)
Alarm A (high level) (Vdc) 0 0 0 Flash 0 0 0 0 Flash X Flash 0
Summary Relay output

(Energised/Not
energised)
Alarm C NE E E E E NE NE NE NE NE E E
Alarm B NE E E E E E E NE NE NE E E
Alarm A NE E E E E E E E E NE E E
Fault (Relay D) NE E E E E E E E E E NE NE
(no time delay)
Fault (Relay D) NE E E E E E E E E E E NE
(4 hour time delay)
Auto Man
reset reset
Test mode sequence 5s 10 s 15 s 20 s 25 s 30 s 35 s 40 s 45 s 50 s 55 s 60 s
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY
LED power/active 0 Flash X Flash X X X X X X 0 0
LED alarm C (low level) 0 0 0 Flash Flash X X X X X Flash 0
LED alarm B (middle 0 0 0 Flash 0 0 Flash X X X Flash X
level)
LED alarm A (high level) 0 0 0 Flash 0 0 0 0 Flash X Flash 0
Reset/Test/Service button: Calibration/Alarm Thresholds

Three functions: The unit and remote sensors are normally
supplied with default settings.
A single press of 1 second duration will reset the
alarm (manual reset mode) if the concentration is Warning!
below the alarm threshols level. The alarm thresholds and remote sensor offset
A single press of 5 seconds duration will initiate

Self Test Mode and is indicated by loss of all
LED s.
A single press of 10 seconds duration will initiate

Service Mode and is indicated by flashing of all
LED s.
11-110
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
should only be set or adjusted by suitable
competent technicians.
Classification: EN 50 081-1, ed. 1 1992

The product is CE certified and conforms with EN 50 082-2, ed. 1 1995
the EMC-directive 89/336/EEC fulfilling the reg-
quirements of:
11-111
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
11-112
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9989-001 Item: 470
11-113
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0124-002 Item: 478
Rev: 00 Date:
20140519
THERMOMETER
Range: 0-100ºC
Connect: 1/2 BSP
11-114
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0625-021-033 Item: 507,509
Rev: 00 Date:
DN50-500 DIN PN10
11-115
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0626-129 Item: 508
Rev: 00 Date:
DN300 JIS 5K
11-116
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0437-001~011 Item: 510,511
Rev: 00 Date:
NON RETURN VALVE 20111212
DN100 - DN600 DIN PN10
11-117
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0627-009 Item: 512
Rev: 00 Date:
DN300 DIN PN10
11-118
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0627-007 Item: 513
Rev: 00 Date:
DN200 DIN PN10
11-119
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: M0156-001 Item: 514
Rev: 01 Date:
20070903
SHUT OFF VALVE DN15
Connect: 1/2 BSP
Parts Name Material Features

Body ASTM A351-CF8M The thread ends conform to
End cap ASTM A351-CF8M ASME B1.20.1 (NTP)
Ball ASTM A351-CF8M DIN 2999 & BS 21
ISO 228/1 & ISO 7/1
Stem AISI 316
Handle AISI 304 Investment casting
Gland nut AISI 304 Blow-out proof stem
Nut & washer AISI 304 Full bore
Ball seat R-PTFE 1000 psi W.O.G.
Body seal PTFE
15 % glassfiber fill PTFE
Stem packing PTFE reinforce seat
Thrust washer PTFE
PTFE seal & packing
Handle sleeve VINYL
Latch lock handle (option)
Mounting pad refers from DIN 3337 &
ISO 5211
Size øD L H W øP M Cv
1/2 15 66 49 115 36 M5 10
* All dimensions are in millimeter (mm).

* Cv is defined as the flow in GPM that a valve
will carry with a pressure drop of 1 psi when liq-
uid is water at 60°F
11-120
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N9314-001 Item: 515
Rev: 00 Date:
SHUT OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 20071019
DN50 DIN PN16
11-121
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0453-001~017 Item: 523,524
Rev: 00 Date:
DN25 - DN600 DIN PN 10/16
11-122
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8149-013 Item: 525
Rev: 00 Date:
Steamheater 20120803
ST-TR-2,0-900-900-5x2R-150
11-123
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: P0222-004 Item: 526
Rev: 00 Date:
EL. HEATER 20140519
RQD 440V/340kW 60Hz
11-124
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8149-010 Item: 527
Rev: 00 Date:
Cooling Coil 20120803
CW-TR-2,0-840-840-6R-21-HCu/CuSn
11-125
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8936-001 Item: 528
Rev: 01 Date:
20150311
STEAM FILTER
Fig. 33 DN25 DIN PN 10/16
DESCRIPTION
The Fig 33 is a cast iron integrally flanged Y-type
strainer. The standard stainless steel screen has
0,8 mm perforations.
LIMITING CONDITIONS
Body design conditions: PN16
Maximum design temperature: 300 oC
Minimum recommended temperature: -10 oC
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test
pressure of 24 bar g.
OPERATING RANGE
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20
2 Cap SG iron DIN 1693 GG 25
3 Cap gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
4 Strainer screen Austentic stain- ASTM A240 316L
less steel
Kv values
Size DN25
Perforations 0,8 mm 13
*PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturat-

ed steam
A-A Flanged BS 4504 PN16

B-B Flanged AS 2129 Table F
C-C Flanged ANSI 125
11-126
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8936-001 Item: 528
Dimensions (approx.) in mm DISPOSAL
PN 16 AS2129 The product is recyclable. No ecological hazard
ANSI 125 Screening is anticipated with disposal of this product provid-
area cm2 ing due care is taken.
Size A A A B C Weight
DN25 160 157 154 95 150 73 3.4
INSTALLATION
The strainer should be installed in the direction of
Recommended tightening torques
flow as indicated on the body, in a vertically
downwards or horizontal pipeline. In a horizontal
line on steam and gases the pocket should be in Item Qty Size Nm
the horizontal plane. On liquid systems the pock- 2 1 DN25 27 M42 100-110
et should point downwards.
Note! Because cast iron has very limited ductility

is it important not to overtighten flanged joints
particularly where raised faces are provided on
the flanges. Therefore it is recommended that
bolting having a yield strength not exceeding 240
N/mm2 should be used.
MAINTENANCE
Pressure
Before attempting any maintenance of the strain-
er, consider what is or may have been in the
pipeline. Ensure that any pressure is isolated
and safely vented to atmospheric pressure
before attempting to maintain the strainer. Do not
assume that the system is depressurised even
when a pressure gauge indicates zero.
Temperature
Allow time for temperature to normalise after iso-
lation to avoid the danger of burns and consider
whether protective clothing (including safety
glasses) is required.
11-127
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8935-001 Item: 529
Rev: 00 Date:
20071029
STEAM TRAP
FT 14-10 DN25 DIN PN10/16
DESCRIPTION Body design conditions PN 16

PMA Maximum allowable pressure 16 bar g @ 100 oC
The steam trap is an SG iron bodied ball float
steam trap having stainless steel working inter- TMA Maximum allowable temperature 250 oC @ 13 bar g
nals and integral automatic air venting facility. Minimum allowable temperature -10 oC
The steam trap can be maintained without dis- PMO Maximum operating pressure for 14 bar g
turbing the pipework. saturated steam service
TMO Maximum operating temperature 250 oC @ 13 bar g
Capsule Minimum operating temperature 0 oC
The BP99 / 32 capsule which is used in the PMX Maximum differential pressure 10 bar
steam trap is suitable for use on 150 oC super- Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 24 bar g
heat @ 0 bar g and 50 oC superheat @ 32 bar g.
Installation note:
Standards The steam trap must be installed with the direc-
tion of flow as indicated on the body, and with the
This product fully complies with the requirements
float arm in a horizontal plain so that it rises and
of the European Pressure Equipment Directive
falls vertically. If required the flow orientation can
97/23/EC
be changed on site.
11-128
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8430-002 Item: 571
Rev: 02 Date:
20071023
L=250mm, 0-250ºC, 4-20mA
Connect: 1/2 BSP
Constructed basicly according to DIN43763 form measuring insert. Short neck by the use of
B. Improved to ensure short response time and through protection tube.
reliable measurement. Heat transfer conducted
through metal all the way from the protection Process entry
tube to the Pt 100 detector which eliminates the
need for conduction compounds. Pt 100 detector Male process entry thread G 1/2 , AISI316/316L.
built into ø6mm insert tube attached to standard
terminal block to enable replacemant. Four wire Cable entry
Weatherproof heavy duty die cast alloy screw
Specification top head type CE.
Protection tube

A Pt 100 detector C Max. temp. H Terminal head O El. connection L Probe length
Transmitter
DIN class B 250ºC Screw top CE, G 1/2 250mm
Specified separately
11-129
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8152-001 Item: 572,574
Rev: 00 Date:
20080327
THERMOMETER 0-250 oC
Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150
FUNCTIONAL AND CONSTRUCTIVE Ring: AISI 304 st.st. bayonet lock.

o
Measuring range: The C measuring range has
been marked by two d stamped on the dial.
Window: Glass
They represent the temperature span recom-
Dial: Aluminium white with black markings.
mended for the use of instruments as per
DIN16203.
Pointer: Black anodized aluminium.
Accuracy: Class 1,0 as per DIN 16203.
Zero-adjustment: External zero-adjustment
o screw.
Ambient temperature: -25---+65 C.
Gasket: EPDM
Working temperature: Continous from -50 oC
to +450 oC; intermittet only between 450 oC to
500 oC.
MEASURING
The bi-metal thermometers are built from a stain-
Overtemperature limit: 30% of full scale range less steel tube inside of which a bi-metal helicoi-
for temperature <=400 oC; max 500 oC. dal spiral is placed.
This spiral is welded to the tip of the tube and on
Special overtemperature (option F02): 100% the other side to a transmission shaft directly
of full scale range for temperature <=150 oC; connected to the pointer.
50% of full scale range for temperature tra 150 The temperature vibrations create a deformation
o
C e 300 oC; max 500 oC. of the bi-metal which is transmitted to the pointer
through a shaft rotation.
Max working pressure: 15 bar (without ther-
mowell).
Protection degree: IP 55 as per IEC 529.
Process connection: AISI 316 st.st.
Bulb: ø 6-6,4-8-9,6 mm. AISI 316 st.st.
Measuring element: Bi-metal spiral shaped.
Welding: AISI 304 st.st. TIG.
Case: AISI 304 st.st.
11-130
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8152-001 Item: 572,574
TYPES AND DIMENSIONS
Lower connection (Cod. 1) Back connection (Cod. 4)
DS A a b C d E H M N S
100 34,5 13 19 49 110,6 39 57 51,5 92,5 See table for Scale
Ranges
PROCESS CONNECTION: TYPES AND DIMENSIONS

Fixed male (Cod. 3) SCALE RANGES
Single Scales oC and bulb length .
oC ø6-6,4 mm
0-250 oC 84 - 500
F CODE Hex. h
1/2 BSP 41M 22* 14
* ø 24 for every-angle connection (cod. 9)
11-131
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8237-001 Item: 576
Rev: 00 Date:
20080327
THERMOMETER 0-100 oC
Type TB 843 E 41M S8 150
FUNCTIONAL AND CONSTRUCTIVE Ring: AISI 304 st.st. bayonet lock.

o
Measuring range: The C measuring range has
been marked by two d stamped on the dial.
Window: Glass
They represent the temperature span recom-
Dial: Aluminium white with black markings.
mended for the use of instruments as per
DIN16203.
Pointer: Black anodized aluminium.
Accuracy: Class 1,0 as per DIN 16203.
Zero-adjustment: External zero-adjustment
o screw.
Ambient temperature: -25---+65 C.
Gasket: EPDM
Working temperature: Continous from -50 oC
to +450 oC; intermittet only between 450 oC to
500 oC.
MEASURING
The bi-metal thermometers are built from a stain-
Overtemperature limit: 30% of full scale range less steel tube inside of which a bi-metal helicoi-
for temperature <=400 oC; max 500 oC. dal spiral is placed.
This spiral is welded to the tip of the tube and on
Special overtemperature (option F02): 100% the other side to a transmission shaft directly
of full scale range for temperature <=150 oC; connected to the pointer.
50% of full scale range for temperature tra 150 The temperature vibrations create a deformation
o
C e 300 oC; max 500 oC. of the bi-metal which is transmitted to the pointer
through a shaft rotation.
Max working pressure: 15 bar (without ther-
mowell).
Protection degree: IP 55 as per IEC 529.
Process connection: AISI 316 st.st.
Bulb: ø 6-6,4-8-9,6 mm. AISI 316 st.st.
Measuring element: Bi-metal spiral shaped.
Welding: AISI 304 st.st. TIG.
Case: AISI 304 st.st.
11-132
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8237-001 Item: 576
TYPES AND DIMENSIONS
Lower connection (Cod. 1) Back connection (Cod. 4)
DS A a b C d E H M N S
100 34,5 13 19 49 110,6 39 57 51,5 92,5 See table for Scale
Ranges
PROCESS CONNECTION: TYPES AND DIMENSIONS

Fixed male (Cod. 3) SCALE RANGES
Single Scales oC and bulb length .
oC ø6-6,4 mm
0-100 oC 100-500
F CODE Hex. h
1/2 BSP 41M 22* 14
* ø 24 for every-angle connection (cod. 9)
11-133
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8154-001 Item: 583
Rev: 00 Date:
20071029
DEW POINT TRANSMITTER
DMT 242
INTRODUCTION 2. Fasten the transmitter to the process pipe s

fitting by thighting from the nut of the probe
The DMT 242 is a dewpoint transmitter for wide
(24 mm).
range of OEM applications. DMT 242 measures
dewpoint with excellent long term stability which
is maintained automatically with the patented
auto-calibration procedure. The used DRYCAP®
polymer sensor technology is also durable
against dew in case condenced water exists in
the process during system malfunction. The
product mechanics have been designed for
harsh environments requiring protection against
dust, dirt and splashed water.
The disconnection and reconnection of the trans-

mitter is easy with the connector where the out-
put signal and supply voltage wires are WIRING
connected. The unit has also serial line for res- 1. Remove the cover.
caling the analog output.
2. Take out the connector.
MOUNTING 3. Take out the screw terminal from the con-
nector by pushing it out e.g. with the fixing
1. Insert the sealing washer on the probe and
screw.
set the probe through the fitting of the proc-
ess pipe. The probe has G 1/2 ISO 228/1 4. Use 3-wire cable. Connect the wires to the
parallel thread. connector terminals as follows:
11-134
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8154-001 Item: 583
5. Inser the wired screw terminal back into the NOT as indicated in the figure. Fasten the
connector exactly in the position indicated in fixing screw.
the figure Wiring and installation of the con-
6. Install the back cover allowing the cable run
nector . Push the fixing screw through the
through the hole in the cover. The transmit-
connector. Fasten the cable clamp. Insert
ter is ready for use.
the wired connector into the counter con-
nector. NOTE: The connection is incompati- When the power is switched on, wait about 7
ble if the positioning of the screw terminal is minutes before taking measurements. A start-up
self-diagnostics freeze the output during the first
operation minutes.
Wiring and installation of the connector.
NOTE! Screw terminal shall be installed to the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

connector excactly in the position shown in the
figure (terminals 2 and 3 as an upper edge) Dewpoint temperature
Measurement range: -80 - +20 °C
CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE
When the dewpoint is below 0 °C, the transmitter
Replacing the sintered filter outputs frost point.
If the sintered filter is dirty it can prolong the
response time of the measurement. If the filter Dewpoint accuracy with DRYCAP® 180M +/-
needs to be changed unscrew the filter and 2°C (see figure below)
replace the old filter with a new one.
Calibration
It is recommended to perform a calibration
checking every other year. A field checking can
be carried out by using a calibrated reference
probe and comparing the readings measured
with the transmitter and the reference probe.
11-135
Wärtsilä Moss AS
Part no: N8154-001 Item: 583
Response time 63% [90%] at 20 °C gas temper- Dimensions in mm
ature at flow rate > 1 l/min and 1 bar pressure:
-60 - -20 °C Td 5 s [10 s]
-20 - -60 °C Td 45 s [10 min]
Operating environment
Temperature 0 - +60 °C
Relative humidity 0 - 100% RH
Pressure 0 - 20 bar
Sample flow rate no effect
Output
Analog output 4-20 mA
Resolution for analog output +/- 0.002 mA
Typical temperature dependence 0.0008 mA/°C
Serial line for service use RS232
General
Sensor DRYCAP® 180M
Operation voltage 17 - 35 VDC
20 - 28 VAC
Power consumption 24 VDCmax 220 mA
External load for max 500 ohm
current output
Connector for supply voltage
and signal output
Max wire size 0.75 mm2
Max wire diameter 6.5 mm/ PG7
Service cable for serial lineDMT242RS
Probe material stainless steel
(AISI 316L)
Sensor protection stainless steel
sintered filter
(HM47280)
Mechanical connection G1/2 ISO 228-1
thread with bonded
seal ring (U-seal)
Electronics housing Plastic (ABS/PC)
Housing classification IP 65 (NEMA 4)
Storage temperature range-40 - +70 °C
The emission and immunity test have been per-

formed according to the standard IEC 61326-1.
11-136
Manuals
H360x IGOA System – Part : 01526

Content
ii
Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System
The Hamworthy Moss’ Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System, thereafter named as
the IGOA System, consists of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer mounted on a gas sam-
pling board.
The manuals for the IGOA System are made of 2 parts:
Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer Manual, which gives general instructions for the
installation, operation and maintenance of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer; and
Part 2: Inert Gas Sampling Board Manual, which gives instructions for the in-
stallation, operation and maintenance of the gas sampling board and the IGOA
System as a whole system
For the installation, operation and maintenance of the IGOA System, both ma-
nuals must be read carefully in their entirety.
The instructions have been made in general terms and do not take into considera-
tion the existing equipment of the Inert Gas System and its installation. As such,
the instruction manuals are designed for the standard IGOA System.
The manual does not describe all possible situations but only the most common
and known situations, and cannot replace the necessary instruction and education
of the personnel.
Should situations not described in the manual occur, which cannot be solved in
accordance with normal known practice and good workmanship, the operator
should contact Hamworthy Moss AS for instructions.
Hamworthy Moss AS reserves the right to minor alterations and improvements

owing to developments without being obliged to enter the corresponding changes
in this manual.
iii
Preface
Hamworthy Moss AS reserves the copyright of the Manual. Without prior written
permission of Hamworthy Moss AS, the Manual may not be copied and given to
unauthorized people.
iv
Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System
PREFACE III
CONTENT V
PART 1: H36 OXYGEN ANALYZER 1

1 INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 5
1.2 INQUIRIES AND FEEDBACK 5
1.3 ABOUT THE ANALYZER 6
2 ANALYZER SPECIFICATIONS 7
3 ANALYZER INSTALLATION & CONNECTIONS 8
3.1 CONTROL AT DELIVERY 8
3.2 WHERE TO INSTALL THE ANALYZER 8
3.3 SAFETY ASPECTS 9
3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 11
3.4.1 Power Supply 11
3.4.2 Sensor Connections - SEN 12
3.4.3 Relay Outputs – D-OUT 12
3.4.4 Input Connections – INPUT 13
3.4.5 Analog Output Connections – A-OUT 13
3.4.6 SD Card 14
3.4.7 Other Connections 15
4 MENU STRUCTURE 16
4.1 MAIN MENU 16
4.2 GRAPH MENU 17
4.3 INFORMATION MENU 18
4.4 CALIBRATION MENU 19
4.5 TOOLS MENU 19
4.6 NAVIGATING THE MENU STRUCTURE 21
5 CONFIGURATION & COMMISSIONING 22

5.1 SETTING OF BASIC DISPLAY PARAMETERS 22
5.2 SETTING OF ALARM LIMITS 23
5.3 SETTING OF ANALOG INPUTS 23
5.4 SETTING OF ANALOG OUTPUTS 24
v
Appendix
5.4.1 Analog Output 1 24

5.5 BACK-FLUSHING & AUTO CALIBRATION FOR H36 27
5.6 LOADING DEFAULT SETTINGS & FACTORY SETTINGS 27
5.7 COMMISSIONING OF THE ANALYZER 28
6 CALIBRATION 29
6.1 CALIBRATION WITH KNOWN OXYGEN GASES 30
6.2 ARTIFICIAL CALIBRATION OF OXYGEN SIGNAL 31
7 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 32
7.1 CALIBRATION 32
7.2 ANALYZER 32
8 TROUBLE SHOOTING 33
9 ANALYZER SPARE PARTS 35
10 APPENDIX 37
10.1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARGE 37
10.3 DIGITAL FLOW SWITCH (OPTIONAL) 40
PART 2: INERT GAS SAMPLING BOARD 45

11. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 48
12. SYSTEM INSTALLATION 49
12.2 WHERE TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM 49
12.4 SINGLE BOARD 50
12.4.1 Mounting Panel 50
12.4.2 Sample Gas Connection 50
12.4.3 Calibration Gas Connection 51
12.4.4 Vent Line Connection 53
12.4.5 Analyzer and Electrical Connection 53
12.4.6 Digital Flow Switch (Optional) 53
12.5 DOUBLE BOARD 53
13. SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 57

13.1 INSTALLATION CHECKS OF THE SAMPLING BOARD 57
13.3 START OF SYSTEM 57
14. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 59

14.1 SAMPLE AND TEST GAS FLOW SYSTEM 59
14.2 FILTER AND BUBBLE GLASS 59
14.3 ANALYZER 60
15. SPARE PARTS 61
vi
Manual
Part No.: 01480

Program Menu Structure
Figure 1: Program Menu Structure of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer
2
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
1 INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 5
1.2 INQUIRIES AND FEEDBACK 5
1.3 ABOUT THE ANALYZER 6
2 ANALYZER SPECIFICATIONS 7
3 ANALYZER INSTALLATION & CONNECTIONS 8
3.2 WHERE TO INSTALL THE ANALYZER 8
3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 11
3.4.1 Power Supply 11
3.4.2 Sensor Connections - SEN 12
3.4.3 Relay Outputs – D-OUT 12
3.4.4 Input Connections – INPUT 13
3.4.5 Analog Output Connections – A-OUT 13
3.4.6 SD Card 14
3.4.7 Other Connections 15
4 MENU STRUCTURE 16
4.1 MAIN MENU 16
4.2 GRAPH MENU 17
4.3 INFORMATION MENU 18
4.4 CALIBRATION MENU 19
4.5 TOOLS MENU 19
4.6 NAVIGATING THE MENU STRUCTURE 21
5 CONFIGURATION & COMMISSIONING 22

5.1 SETTING OF BASIC DISPLAY PARAMETERS 22
5.2 SETTING OF ALARM LIMITS 23
5.4 SETTING OF ANALOG OUTPUTS 24
5.5 BACK-FLUSHING & AUTO CALIBRATION FOR H36 27
5.6 LOADING DEFAULT SETTINGS & FACTORY SETTINGS 27
3
Content
6 CALIBRATION 29
6.1 CALIBRATION WITH KNOWN OXYGEN GASES 30
6.2 ARTIFICIAL CALIBRATION OF OXYGEN SIGNAL 31
7 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 32
7.1 CALIBRATION 32
7.2 ANALYZER 32
8 TROUBLE SHOOTING 33
9 ANALYZER SPARE PARTS 35
10 APPENDIX 37
10.1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARGE 37
10.3 DIGITAL FLOW SWITCH (OPTIONAL) 40
4
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
This Manual contains data and instructions for the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer.
The instructions have been made in general terms and do not take into considera-
tion a specific installation. As such, the instruction manual is designed only for the
equipment delivered by Hamworthy Moss AS.
The manual does not describe all possible situations, but only the most common
and known situations, and cannot replace the necessary education of the person-
nel. Should situations not described in the manual occur, which cannot be solved
in accordance with normal known practice and good workmanship, the operator
should contact Hamworthy Moss AS for instructions.
Hamworthy Moss AS reserves the right to minor alterations and improvements

owing to developments without being obliged to enter the corresponding changes
in this manual.
Hamworthy Moss AS reserves the copyright of the manual. Without prior written
permission of Hamworthy Moss AS, the manual may not be copied and given to
unauthorized people.
All claims and inquiries for spares shall be addressed to Hamworthy Moss AS or
our distributors.
In all correspondence or when ordering spare parts, please state carefully the
equipment type and fabrication number, which you can find on the label on the
right side of the blue analyzer box.
5
Introduction
Hamworthy Moss AS appreciates all feedback and suggestions for the improve-
ment. If you have any questions or find any errors in the manual, you are welcome
to contact us at the following address:
Hamworthy Moss AS
Vaerftsgt. 13
P.O. Box 1053
NO-1510 MOSS
Phone: +47 6927 9900
Fax: +47 6925 4578
E-mail: moss@hamworthy.com
Web: www.hamworthy.com
The H36 Oxygen Analyzer is designed to measure the content of oxygen with con-
centrations up to 21.0%. The H36 Oxygen Analyzer can be used to measure the
content of oxygen in the N2 or CO2 based inert gas.
The H36 Oxygen Analyzer

makes use of a zirconia sen-
sor. The zirconium dioxide
sensors have long been es-
tablished as industry stan-
dards. The H36 is based on a
new type of industrial sensor,
which can be used in a wide
range of applications.
The oxygen sensor is com-

posed of a potentiometric
oxygen sensing cell and an Figure 1-1: Simplified schematic of the zirconium cell
amperometric oxygen pump-
ing cell. The oxygen sensing
cell has two electrodes, one exposed to the stack/inert gas and the other to the am-
bient atmosphere. At high temperature, oxygen ions diffuse through the ceramic of
the sensing cell. The oxygen pumping cell with an electrical voltage will effect the
pumping of oxygen ions from the anode to the cathode of the sensing cell. Due to
the transportation of the oxygen ions, an electrical voltage originates. This voltage
will be detected by the electrodes and converted into a signal. The signal is pro-
portional to the oxygen concentration in the stack/inert gas, thus being used for
the processing in the analyzer.
6
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Analyzer
Sensor used Zirconia sensor Type SEN1 or SEN9
Measurement range 0.0% to 21.0% O2
Ambient temperature -15°C to 55°C
Power Supply 100-230 VAC – 50/60Hz or
24 VDC
Power Consumption 40 VA per analyzer
Digital display Touch screen 71 x 39 mm
Output signals Active 4…20 mA – range selectable – default
0.0…25.0%
Load output (max.) 600 ohm / 24 VDC
Relays 4 relays, volt free, 5A 250 VAC
Alarm functions Low, High, High-High O2 levels – free configurable
System failure alarm
Response time* 90% of measuring scale in lest than 45 sec. with
sample flow rate of 0.8 l/m, sample line of 1 m
Repeatability +/– 0.1 % of the measuring range
Linearity/Accuracy +/– 0.5 % of the measuring range
Drift (one month) +/– 0.1 % of the measuring range
Dimensions 17 × 20 × 9 cm (H × W × D)
Weight Ca. 2.5 kg without packaging
Analyzer casing Aluminum casing IP67
Optional: Oxygen Analyzer with digital flow switch module
Specifications are subject to changes without notice.

* Response time depends on the sample flow rate and the sample line’s length
7
Analyzer Installation & Connections
Read this chapter in its entirety before installing the analyzer.
Upon receipt of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer, please inspect and confirm that the re-
ceived scope of supply is in accordance with the packing list and not damaged.
Any discrepancy should be reported to the supplier immediately. If any of the re-
ceived parts are damaged, the shipping company should be informed, and new
parts should be made available before completing the installation.
Satisfactory operation of the H36, faultless functions, and minimal maintenance

are achieved by paying attention to the following notes:
The equipment should be installed in a clean area away from dust, oil mist,
and moisture. The analyzer should be installed at viewing level in an area with
good access for operating and servicing.
The location and installation of the analyzer must be chosen, so that the am-
bient temperature at any time is below 55 C.
8
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Warning
Follow the operating instructions! Please ensure correct connection of

all power and signal cables before operating the analyzer.
The H36 Oxygen Analyzer is only suitable for installation in a safe, non-
hazardous area and not suitable for use with flammable sample gases.
It should be pointed out that installation and operation of the H36 Oxy-
gen Analyzer and associated equipment must be carried out by skilled,
trained, and certified personnel, and that Hamworthy Moss AS does not
take any responsibility for the operation of the analyzer and associated
equipment whatsoever.
The analyzer must only be applied as described in this Instruction Ma-
nual. If the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by Hamworthy
Moss AS, the protection provided by the analyzer may be impaired.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon
proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance.
Hazardous voltage!
Disconnect power before installing or servicing the analyzer. Ignoring this warn-
ing can result in severe personal injury or material damage. Read the instruction
carefully to ensure correct connection of all power and signal leads.
Ensure that the correct voltage is connected to the analyzer (see rating marked on
the analyzer name plate).
Circuit breaker!
The installation must include a means of isolating electrical power by a clearly
marked switch or circuit breaker external to the analyzer. The external switch or
circuit breaker shall be in close proximity to the analyzer and within the easy
reach of the operator.
Overload protection!
For compliance with the safety requirements IEC 61010-1 (2003), the installation
must include a means of overcurrent protection to provide protection against ex-
cessive energy being drawn from the power supply system in case of a fault in the
analyzer.
Protective earth!
The analyzer must be connected to protective earth.
9
Installation and fault finding!

Electrical installation and fault finding on the analyzer should only be undertaken
by a suitably trained and qualified engineer.
EMC!
For compliance with the EMC product standard IEC 60533 (1999), the connection
cables for the main supply, relays, interface, and analog output signals should be
shielded or provide equivalent protection.
Special precautions have to be taken for "long" signal or control lines of more
than 30 meter.
Sensor!
The sensor must not be exposed to strong mechanical shocks. Other-wise the sen-
sor element may crack without visible damage.
The sensor must be connected to the analyzer before the analyzer is under voltage
(risk of damage).
As soon as the analyzer is under voltage, the connection to the sensor must not be
interrupted. Therefore, please disconnect the power when you need to con-
nect/disconnect the sensor.
Connections!
All electrical connections and power supply are accessed inside the analyzer. To
gain access, the top cover of the analyzer must be unbolted using standard 4-6 mm
screwdriver.
Poisonous gases!
Both sensor types, SEN1 and SEN9, used for H36 Oxygen Analyzer are not suita-
ble for installation in an area with high concentration of Methane.
Recycling!
Please do not dispose any part of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer with regular refuse.
Disposal should be in accordance with the requirements of the current statutory
regulations.
Symbol identification
Caution, risk of danger
Caution, risk of electrical shock
Caution, hot surface
Protective earth
10
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Note
Each analyzer will be configured at the factory. The electrical connec-

tions, therefore, are dependent on the actual system configuration.
The terminals are all located on the PC-Board. For details, please see Figure 3-1.
Only those functions to be used shall be connected.
Power supply terminal is on the bottom right corner of the electrical board, where
there is a mark of power supply rating (100-230 VAC or 24 VDC). For details, see
Figure 3-1.
Before connecting the power supply, please make sure that the power supply rat-
ing for the analyzer must correspond with the power supply available.
Figure 3-1: Terminals PC-Board – 100-230 VAC
11
The analyzer is arranged with the sensor connection terminal SEN prewired down
to the 5 poles sensor female connection.
Terminal 1 (Brown) = Sensor electrode (oxygen)

Terminal 2 (White) = Sensor electrode (oxygen)
Terminal 3 (Blue) = Sensor electrode (oxygen)
Terminal 4 = No connection
Terminal 5 (Black) = Sensor heating (oxygen)
Terminal 6 (Gray) = Ground
The analyzer is arranged with four (4) relay outputs connected to D-OUT with 14
terminals. The relay functions and connections of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer are as
follows:
Relay Relay function Terminal Connections
No.
Internal power supply Terminal 1

+ 24 VDC
Relay 1 Alarm High/Low O2 Terminals 2.1-3.1-4.1 Inverted
level (NC-COM-NO) Normally energized
Relay 2 Alarm High High O2 Terminals 5.2-6.2-7.2 Inverted
level (NC-COM-NO) Normally energized
Relay 3 System failure alarm* Terminals 8.3-9.3-10.3 Inverted
(NC-COM-NO) Normally energized
Relay 4 Calibration Span Gas Terminals 11.4-12.4-13.4 Normally
– not in use as per (NC-COM-NO) de-energized
default
Internal power supply Terminal 14
– Ground
Alarms
System failure alarm includes sensor alarm and alarm for open loop of the analog
outputs.
For the H36 Oxygen Analyzer configured with a digital flow switch, the system
failure alarm (Relay 3) includes also the flow alarm.
For setting of values for alarm O2 levels, see section 5.2.
12
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Normally energized
Normally energized means the relay is energized in the alarm free condition dur-
ing operation. The relay will be de-energized when there is an alarm or when the
supply voltage disappears from the analyzer. Thus, the normally energized relays
will give a fault signal in the event of failure of power to the analyzer.
Normally de-energized
Normally de-energized means the relay is de-energized in the normal operating

condition. Relay 4 (normally de-energized) will be energized in span calibration
condition.
The input connections - INPUT are right under the sensor connections SEN. The
terminal is arranged with 8 poles for 2 analog inputs and 4 digital inputs. The con-
figuration is as follows:
Terminals 1 & 3: Ai01 – Analog Input 1 for connection of a passive 4-20 mA signal*
Terminals 1 & 8: Ai01 – Analog Input 1 for connection of an active 4-20 mA signal**
Terminals 2 & 3: Ai02 – Analog Input 2 for connection of a passive 4-20 mA signal*
Terminals 2 & 8: Ai02 – Analog Input 2 for connection of an active 4-20 mA signal**
Terminals 4 & 8: Di00 – Digital Input 1 for connection of an NPN input
* Passive input signal means signal voltage from the H36 analyzer.
** Active input signal means signal voltage from external source.
For the H36 analyzer with digital flow switch module, analog input 1 and digital
input 3 is per default set-up for the digital flow switch. Please see Appendix 10.3
for the technical specification and connections of the digital flow switch.
For setting of analog inputs, please see Appendix 10.2.
There are two active 4-20 mA output signals*** for load up to 600 ohm. The con-
figuration is as follows:
Terminals 1 & 2 = Analog Output 1 for the remote indication of oxygen level
Terminal 3 = No connection
Terminals 4 & 5 = Analog Output 2 (optional)
13
*** Active output signal means signal voltage from H36 analyzer.
For setting of analog outputs, please see section 5.4.
SD Card is used for storage of the historical trend of O2 and the logbook. SD card
can also be used to load a new software version to the analyzer.
Data log
The analyzer has an internal memory. There are 6 measured values logged in the
internal memory every minute. However, the internal memory has storage for only
the last 1 hour of logging, which is equal to 360 log values. If there is no SD card
installed, the new log values will supersede the old log values. There will be no
historical trend curve and alarm logs as well.
When there is an SD Card installed in the analyzer, the internal memory will be
saved on the SD Card every minute. If Analyzer alarm and Logbook functions are
on, the alarms will also be logged on the SD Card.
There are two log files in the SD card, a log file for O2 values – and a log
file for alarms – .
If you want to read the log files directly from the SD-card by a Windows-operated
computer, use Notepad to open the log files. Do not open the log files by WordPad
since WordPad will damage the format of the log files. As a consequence, the ana-
lyzer will be unable to further log the data to SD card.
The best way to read the log files is to copy them to the local disk of your com-
puter; and then open them from your computer. If you do this way, you can use
any program that can open a txt file including Notepad, WordPad, MS Word and
MS Excel.
The data in the log file – includes 5 columns, i.e.:

YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS Datalog of O2 Datalog Unix time
content (/100) (optional)
2009-11-12 13:01:54 2089 0000 1258027314
The SD card shall be replaced after 2 years due to the limited capacity of the SD
card.
14
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Software and default configuration uploading
In the SD card, the folder - includes two files and

is the software file and is the default configuration file.
In case you receive a new software version with the two same files named -
and from Hamworthy Moss AS, please do the following
steps:
Replace the old files in the SD card by the new files - and
that you receive from us.
Set the SD card back to the analyzer. Then, restart the analyzer. The analyzer
will now automatically check the SD card to see if there is a new software ver-
sion. If yes, the new software will be automatically loaded to the internal
memory of the analyzer.
After uploading a new software version, reload our default settings by choos-
ing in Tools setting\Service (password level 2)\Load de-
fault settings.
Then, you have to re-set the analyzer using the Test and configuration sheet at-
tached to each analyzer or following the instructions in section 5.
For the H36 Oxygen Analyzer, Ethernet, RS-232, and CAN connections are not in
use by default.
15
Menu Structure
Please see Figure 1 for the Program Menu Structure of the H36 Oxygen
Analyzer
The analyzer is designed with a touch screen. The displays the actual
Oxygen value in percent. There are four function keys on the right of the screen,
which are connected to four different functional menus:
and .
Figure 4-1: The H36 Main Menu and 4 functional Menus
16
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
If the alarm function is set-up and an alarm is trigger, the alarm message will dis-
play in the bottom left corner of the screen. The alarm will disappear automatical-
ly when the reading of O2 value is getting out of the alarm zone (O2 level alarms)
or the problem with sensor/output loop is fixed (system failure alarm).
Pressing changes the display into a graphical mode, in which a trend curve of
the log values (Y-axis) is shown on a time scale (X-axis).
The actual oxygen value in per cent is dis-

played in the top right corner of the graph
screen as “ ”.
The trend curve displays the log values

from the SD card. The trend screen has
108 dots in the time line. Therefore, the
trend curve will show 1 log value per dot
if the X timing is set at 18 minutes (6 log
values/minute x 18 minutes = 108 values).
If the X timing is less than 18 minutes, the

trend curve will be a dot line.
If the X timing is 36 minutes, two values

will be printed at the same X-position.
Similarly, if the X-timing is 180 minutes,
10 values will be printed at the same X-
Figure 4-2: History & Settings
position with all different Y values.
Pressing gives access to menu, where you can select to see the
trend curve in a specific historical period, as well as setup a new setting for the
trend curve.
& are to see the trend curve in a specific historical period. For exam-
ple, now it is 12:28 and you want to see the trend curve at 11:00.
First, select and enter the historical point of time.
Then, select , the screen will show to the trend curve at

that specific time.
17
Menu Structure
It will take time for the analyzer to browse an old history point. The longer time
you want to go back, the longer time the analyzer will require to recall the history.
When the analyzer is recalling the history, the touch screen is freezing and will not
immediately re-act to any touch.
If you want to browse a history point dated more than a week ago, it will be the
best to read the history data from the log file in the SD card. For details of how to
read the log file, please refer to section 3.4.6.
is the time range of the trending graph, which can be set upon your re-
quirement, however should not be over 1440 minutes (24 hours). The time range
is displayed on the lower part of the graph screen with the starting point in the
bottom left corner and the ending point in the bottom right corner.
is the maximum of measurement range displayed in the trend curve. De-

fault setting is 25%. Y-limits is displayed in the top left corner of the graph screen
as “ ”
Pressing , you will get the following information:
Sensor diagnostic : Diagnostic code to indicate status of the sensor:

sensor working
and – all of these stages
mean sensor failure or connection failure of sensor cable.
Sensor temperature: The current temperature of the sensor. After starting the ana-
lyzer, it will take about 5 minutes for the sensor to reach its
normal operating temperature.
o
The operating temperature of SEN9 is app. 785 C.
o
The operating temperature of SEN1 is app. 750 C.
When the sensor temperature is much lower than the normal
operating temperature, the display of Oxygen will be incorrect.
The reason might be bad connection between the sensor and
the sensor connection terminal SEN, or a defect sensor.
Raw sensor cnt: The raw adc count signal from the sensor
Analog output 0: Ao00: The current O2 in percent from Analog output 1
Analog output 1: Ao01: Not in use as per default
Relay outputs 1-4: The status of relay outputs 1-4: or
Software version: The software version of the analyzer. For installation of new
software version, see section 3.4.6.
Alarm log: The status of alarm logbook: or . When the status is
, no alarm will be logged. The alarm logbook view in the
Service Menu is also .
Run time in Hrs: The analyzer’s run time in hours - power only
18
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
To browse the list in the information menu, please go up and down the list by us-
ing the scrolling keys .
Pressing gives access to the calibration function. In the calibration menu, you
can:
See the sensor type selected for the analyzer (SEN1 or SEN9)
Access to zero, span, and artificial calibration functions for the analyzer
Set values for the test gases: Zero and Span
Use the scrolling keys to browse the list and press to select the action to
be taken, e.g. selecting will start the span calibration.
For further information, please see section 6 Calibration.
Pressing gives access to the and the operating system of the ana-
lyzer including , , and .
Use the scrolling keys to browse the list and press to select the action to
be taken.
shows all log alarms if the in Tool set-

tings\Commissioning\Alarm Logbook and in Tools setting\Service
(password level 1)\Alarm setting\Analyzer Alarm are .
An O2 level alarm is logged only after the alarm delay runs out (default at 10
seconds for all three alarm levels). The alarm delay for O2 limit can be changed in
Menu. For more details, see section 5.2.
The system failure alarms (sensor or analog output loop alarms) have no alarm de-
lay, and are logged immediately. Data log is saved on the SD card every minute.
19
Menu Structure
The alarm logbook might have the following displays:

: O2 low level alarm
: O2 high level alarm
O2 high high level alarm
: Sensor Failure
: Open Loop of Analog output 1 (Ao00)
Open Loop of Analog output 2 (Ao01)
: The analyzer is restarted
gives access to the settings of the basic display including

and , and . For details of these parameter set-
tings, please see section 5.1.
: the touch panel requires calibration every time the user

reloads the factory settings.
For calibration, select Calibrate Touch panel and follow the instructions on the
screen, i.e. hitting the cross hair appeared on the screen.
If the touch panel is calibrated correctly, i.e. you have hit the cross hair on the
screen, there will be the message . Then, touch-
ing the panel one more time will complete the calibration.
If the touch panel is calibrated incorrectly, i.e. you have hit points outside the
cross hair, the display will show the message
. In this case, you have to calibrate the touch panel again
Please note that it will be the best to calibrate the touch panel with a small pointed
object such as a pencil. However, that pointed object should not be sharp, and you
should not push it hard to cause any damage to the touch screen.
requires an access password.
Password level 1 is , giving you access to the analyzer configuration in-

cluding , and . For
details of these settings, please see section 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5.
Password level 2 gives access to two other functions:

and . For password level 2, see the Testing and Configu-
ration Sheet delivered with each analyzer.
Please see for the overview of the Program Menu Structure.
20
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Figure 4-3: Navigating the menu structure
21
Configuration & Commissioning
Before starting the analyzer for the first time after completing the in-
stallation, please check and confirm that all electrical connections are
installed according to the instruction.
After switching power on, the analyzer readings shall be stable before starting ca-
libration, which will normally take about 5 minutes of warm up time. During the
heating up of the sensor, the will indicate the oxygen content of 0.0.
After several minutes, when the sensor has reached its operation temperature, the
starts displaying the oxygen content.
The route for setting of the basic display parameters is Tools menu\Commissioning
and : Logbook and trend graph

use calendar and clock as reference. The
date and time are per default setup follow-
ing the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
The current time is displayed in the Graph
Menu. and can be re-set upon
your requirement. However, it is recom-
mended not to change date and time fre-
quently as it will be difficult to keep track
on the historical data.
: is for setting the time-

out period, so the system reverts automati-
cally to the from anywhere in Figure 5-1: Basic display settings
22
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
the functional menus (except for the ) if there is no action taken dur-
ing that period. Default setting for auto return is 10 minutes. Minimum setting is 1
minute.
: mode is set here. When the is set ,

the alarm logbook starts to record all of the alarms. The last 12 alarms are shown
in Tools menu\Alarm Logs.
The route for setting of alarm limits is Tools menu\Service (Password level 1:
9490)\Alarm setup.
The H36 has 3 alarms for Oxygen level:
is to setup the low O2

level alarm – default setup at 0.0%
is to setup the high O2

is to setup the high O2

is to setup the alarm

delay for both Low and High O2 level
alarms. Default setup is 100 (equal to 10
seconds).
is to setup the delay for

High-High O2 alarm. Default setup is 100
(equal to 10 seconds).
is to switch alarm
function of the analyzer. When the
Figure 5-2: Settings of Alarm limits
is and one of the alarms
is triggered, the will display the alarm message (e.g. )
in the bottom left corner of the screen.
Both analog inputs are not in use by default. The parameters in both analog input
settings shall not be edited.
23
If you have an agreement with Hamworthy Moss AS to use the analog inputs,
please see Appendix 10.2 for more information.
The route for setting of Analog output 1 is Tools menu\Service (Password level 1:
9490)\Analog in/out settings\Analog output 1
Analog output 1 (Ao00) is connected to terminal A-OUT connection 1 & 2, de-

fault setup to indicate the actual Oxygen value in percent.
The freezing of output signal after calibra-

tion is set-up at 15 seconds by default.
The analog output signal can be scaled by

editing the minimum and maximum val-
ues ( ).
The scale is freely configurable, but

usually only the maximum setting is
changed. The range of the output signal
must correspond to the requirements and
settings of the external instrumentation or
system.
The default setting is 0.0–25.0% oxygen

(0.0% 4 mA and 25.0% 20 mA).
This is appropriate where the external in-
strumentation is operating with an input Figure 5-3: Settings of Analog Output 1
scale of 4–20 mA and display of 0.0–
25.0% oxygen.
If however the external instrumentation is working with an input in a different

range – for example 0.0–10.0% oxygen, i.e. 0.0% 4 mA and 10.0% 20 mA –
then the maximum value in has to be changed – in this example to 10.0.
For other typical output signal charge, please see Appendix 10.1.
24
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
This procedure should usually only be relevant after reloading new factory set-
tings. The calibration of the analog signal is carried out in one of the following
ways:
Option 1: Input of tested values

Select and key-in the value according to the value in
the test sheet attached to each specific analyzer. Press to save. The screen
will automatically come back to the screen. Then,
Select , and key-in the value according to the value in the
value in the test sheet attached to each specific analyzer. Press to
save.
Option 2: Manual calibration
Only if the analog signal does not function properly with the input of the tested
values – Calibration Option 1, the analog signal shall be calibrated manually. For
manual calibration of Analog signal 1 (Ao00), zero test gas and instrument air
shall be used.
Connect a current meter with a range 4-20 mA between terminal A-OUT connec-
tion 1 & 2.
For zero calibration:

Select , enter the oxygen value of the zero test gas and save
Introduce zero test gas to the sensor
Select , then adjust and save the value to correspond with 4 mA
output.
Select , change the value back to the minimum value of the scale re-
quired by the external instrumentation.
For span calibration:

Select , enter 20.9 (oxygen % in the instrument air), and save
Introduce the instrument air to the sensor
Select , then adjust and save the value to correspondent with 20
mA output
Select , change the value back to the maximum value of the scale re-
quired by the external instrumentation.
25
The function can be switched . The default setting is . If the function

is , there will be an alarm displayed “ ” in the if the
loop between A-OUT connection 1 & 2 is open.
The route for setting of Analog output 2 is Tools menu\Service (Password level 1:
9490)\Analog in/out settings\Analog output 2.
Analog output 2 (Ao01) is connected to terminal A-OUT connection 4 & 5. Ana-

log output 2 is optional, which can be arranged to indicate O2 content or the Ana-
log input 1 (Ai01). All parameters are preset at the factory and normally will not
require any settings. If you need to change any of the settings, follow the same
procedure for setting of Analog output 1.
The following procedure is applied only when analog output 2 is arranged to indi-
cate analog input 1 (Ai01):
Note
Only if the analog signal does not function properly with the input of test
values, which you can find in the test sheet attached to each specific
analyzer, Analog output 2 shall be calibrated manually.
Before the manual calibration of Analog output 2, please check the set-
tings of Analog input 1 following the procedure in section 10.2.
The display scale of the Analog output 2 should be setup with the same
display scale of the Analog input 1.
Connect a current meter to terminal A-OUT connection 4 & 5 for measuring the
analog output 2.
For zero calibration

Simulate a 4 mA current to Analog input 1. For passive signal, connect to ter-
minal INPUT connection 1 & 3. For active signal, connect to terminal
INPUT connection 1 & 8.
Select , then adjust and save the value that correspond to 4 mA
showed in the current meter connected to the analog output 2
26
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
For span calibration

Simulate a 20 mA current to Analog input 1. For passive signal, connect to
terminal INPUT connection 1 & 3. For active signal, connect to terminal
INPUT connection 1 & 8.
Select , then adjust and save the value that correspond to 20 mA
showed in the current meter connected to the analog output 2.
The route for setting of back-flushing and auto calibration is Tools setting\Services
(password level 1: 9490)\Back-flushing setup.
The back-flushing and auto calibration

functions are not in use as per default.
Therefore, all the default settings must not
be changed.
The default setting of

is 0 and must not be
changed.
is per default set-up

at 30 seconds.
The default setting of

is 0 and must not be
changed. Figure 5-4: Setting of Back-flushing
is the freezing time of output signals after calibration or back-

flushing. Default setup is 15 seconds.
The route for these two functions is Tools setting\Services (password level 2 – see
configuration sheet for password).
It is possible to go back to the standard settings by this function. After loading de-
fault settings, the analyzer will restart automatically loading the default settings
from the SD card to the analyzer. After reload default settings, please re-set the
27
analyzer using the Test & Configuration Sheet attached to each analyzer or fol-
lowing the instruction in section 5.
In case the in the SD card has been deleted accidentally, please con-
tact Hamworthy Moss AS for resending the standard setting file.
Loading factory settings should be used only under the instructions from Ham-
worthy Moss AS. After loading factory settings, you must calibrate the touch pan-
el following the instruction in section 4.5, and then re-set the analyzer following
the instruction in section 5 as well as instructions from Hamworthy Moss AS for
each specific analyzer
After completing the configuration, please verify the installation and set-up of the
analyzer with the following steps:
Check that the span calibration gas is connected before span calibration; and
zero calibration gas is connected before zero calibration. Calibration gases
shall be connected to the sensor without any leaking and in accordance with a
good installation practice. A leaking connection will result in loss of calibra-
tion gas and may result in poor calibration. In order to have the accurate result,
the pressure and flow rate of the sample gas should be the same as the pressure
and flow rate of the calibration gasses.
Check that the setup of analog output signals is correct.
Check that the setup of alarm levels is correct.
Check that the setup of calibration values for zero and span calibration gas is
correct.
Calibration can be performed when the indication of oxygen content on the

has stabilized, normally about 5 minutes after starting the analyzer. Calibra-
tion is carried out as described in the following chapter.
28
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
After completing the installation and before putting the analyzer into
operation, the analyzer must be calibrated.
After switching power on, the analyzer readings shall be stable before starting ca-
libration, which will normally take about 5 minutes of warm-up time.
The analyzer is arranged for calibration by using certified calibration gases or in-
strument air. In addition, the analyzer can be artificially calibrated. However, ar-
tificial calibration should only be used for intermediate purposes and cannot re-
place manual calibration with a known and certified calibration gases.
Note
For the purpose of calibration, the signal from sensor shall be stable for
at least 10 seconds. Therefore, during calibration there must not be
variations in pressure or flow in the calibration gas supplied to the sen-
sor.
In order to have an accurate result, the pressure and flow rate of the
sample gas should be the same as the pressure and flow rate of the
calibration gases.
During the calibration with known oxygen gases, press will restart
the analyzer without changing any change of settings and calibration
values.
29
Calibration
The zero calibration gas to be used shall be a mixture of pure nitrogen with a
known amount of oxygen. The best practice of zero calibration is to use a calibra-
tion gas just below the target range of the application.
Figure 6-1: Calibration Menu Structure & Quick guide
For the span calibration gas, clean dry instrument air with oxygen content of
20.9% is recommended.
Before starting to calibrate the analyzer, check the settings of zero and span gas
used in
If the value of zero gas used is not correct, select and enter the
value of the zero gas used.
If the value of span gas used is not correct, select and enter the
value of the span gas used.
Press to go back to the
30
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
To calibrate the oxygen signal, do the following steps:
Introduce zero calibration gas to the sensor, and wait for the zero value read-
ing to stabilize, e.g. 1.8%. Then enter , and select
. The zero calibration is completed when the analyzer goes back to the
. The new calibration value will be displayed after 15 seconds (as
per default setting of freeze output).
Introduce the span calibration gas to the sensor, and wait for the span value
reading to stabilize, e.g. 21.1%. Enter , and select
. The span calibration is completed when the display returns to the
. The new calibration value will be displayed after 15 seconds (as
per default setting of freeze output).
The calibration should be checked according to the requirements of each applica-

tion.
The analyzer is arranged with the possibility to carry out an artificial calibration
using only instrument air. Artificial calibration is carried out as follows:
Apply instrument air with 20.9% oxygen to the sensor
Enter , and select . The artificial calibra-

tion will now start with calibrating first using the instrument air as the
reference; then using the reference Zero point generated by the analyzer.
The calibration is completed when the analyzer is back to normal reading (i.e.
20.9 displayed on the Main menu).
31
Routine Maintenance
The most important routine maintenance task is to calibrate the analyzer regularly.
The analyzer has to be calibrated after each start up of the H36 Oxygen Analyzer. If
in operation continuously, experience has shown that one calibration per week is
sufficient.
The analyzer is tested from the factory. The analyzer does not require any special
maintenance. The LCD shall be kept clean in order to give a clear view and allow
proper operation of the touch screen. The touch screen shall be cleaned by using a
soft damp cloth or soft tissue. Dirt and oil on the surface of the analyzer(s) need to
be removed carefully using neutral detergent and a clean rag.
32
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Trouble-shooting should always be carried out by trained personnel.

The H36 Oxygen Analyzer is connected to hazardous electric voltages,
which can cause severe personal injury or mechanical damage if not
handled correctly and in accordance with normal safety regulations.
Trouble Possible Cause Action

No display at all Check the circuit breaker
Check power supply – the power supply needs to be
at correct voltage
Check fuse inside the analyzer
No display despite power The analyzer is defect Reboot, repair, or exchange
supply and fuse is found OK the analyzer
Display only indication 0.0 No signal from sensor Check connection both at the
analyzer and sensor; Then wait for several minutes, re-
plug the sensor, or restart the analyzer
Check sensor temperature in see
section 4.3 If the sensor temperature could not reach its
operating temperature before it starts working, the sen-
sor’s diagnostic status will show OK, but the display on-
ly indicates 0.0 Check if the sample flow is two high.
Try to take the sensor out of the sensor house and let it
hang in the ambient air to see if the sensor temperature
can reach its operating condition.
Incorrect indication of Oxygen Try to recalibrate the analyzer
level Try artificial calibration if normal calibration is not
working, see section 6.2
Check the sensor’s diagnostic status and temperature
in , see section 4.3. Check sensor
connection, or replace the sensor if it is defect
Incorrect remote display and There might be a mismatch in the output range of the
recording analyzer and the input range of the remote system
Check and correct output signal settings, see section
5.4.
33
Trouble Shooting
Trouble Possible Cause Action

No trend curve Y-limits is set too low reset Y-limits, see section 5.1
Graph Menu may be frozen X-timing is set too high restart the analyzer, reset X-
timing, see section 5.1
Touch panel errors Calibrate the touch panel, see section 4.5
No data log Check the SD card inside the analyzer.
No historical trend curve If yes, check the SD card’s lock mode. The lock but-
ton should always be in the unlock position.
Replace the SD card if it is defect
Unable to reload default set- If the screen shows “ ”, please
tings: check the SD card inside the analyzer. Replace the SD
card if it is defect. Contact Hamworthy Moss AS for a
new SD card with the default setting file
If the screen shows “ ”, please
Contact Hamworthy Moss to resend the default setting
file. Copy the to the SD card (SD-
card:\bin), then try to reload default settings one more
time.
34
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
When ordering spare parts, please quote the fabrication number of

the analyzer, which you can find on the label on the right side of the
blue analyzer box.
Part Part Description the specific appearance of the spare

parts is subject change without notice;
No. the function however will not change
SEN1 Oxygen sensor plug type

00390
– complete with O ring
00477 Sensor cable for SEN1 – 0.8 m
01047 Cable glands – M20 (11-14 mm)
Sensor Housing for SEN1 with stay

01052
with 1/8" BSP connection
Sensor Housing for SEN9 with stay

01378
with 1/8" BSP connection
01251 Fuse 2 AT (pkg of 10)
35
Analyzer Spare parts
Part Part Description the specific appearance of the spare

parts is subject change without notice;
No. the function however will not change
01258 SEN9 Oxygen sensor/w connector – screw type
SD card with H36 software & standard settings

01471
files
01480 This Instruction/Manual
01482 H36 Oxygen Analyzer 100-230 VAC
01483 H36 Oxygen Analyzer 24 VDC
Digital flow switch 0.2-10 l/min, NPN + Analog

01453
(optional)
Other optional equipment – e.g. remote digital display, signal amplifier for loga-
rithmic output, visualization, recording and data logging, monitoring of gas tem-
perature, pressure, and load – can be supplied.
36
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
25
0...10%
0...20.9%
0...25% Default
20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
Signal in mA
Figure 10-1: Typical Oxygen Output Signal Curves
The 4-20 mA / 0-25% signal charge is the default setting
Alternatively, the oxygen output signal charge can be programmed in the

menu. Please see section 5.3.
For a logarithmic output signal, a specific signal converter can be supplied.
37
Appendix
The two analog input signals of the H36 can be configured for most input require-
ments such as pressure, temperature, flow and opacity. The analyzer can be op-
tional arranged with one or both analog inputs. For the analyzer with digital flow
switch module, Analog Input 1 is per default set-up for the digital flow switch.
Both input signals can also be configured to be displayed on the . See

Figure 10-2 for details of the when both analog inputs are in use.
Position 1: Display of Analog input 1 (e.g. flow in l/m)
Position 2: Display of Analog input 2 (e.g. gas temperature in oC)
Position 3: Current Oxygen value in percent
Position 4: Display of the current alarm (e.g. Alarm of open analog output
loop) – if there is no alarm, there will be no display here.
Figure 10-2: Main Menu if both analog inputs are agreed to be used
The route for setting of Analog Inputs is Tools menu\Service (Password level 1: 9490)
\Analog in/out settings\Analog input 1 or Analog input 2.
Analog input 1 (Ai01) is connected to terminal INPUT connection 1 & 3 (pas-

sive input signal) or terminal INPUT connection 1 & 8 (active input signal)
Analog input 2 (Ai02) is connected to terminal INPUT connection 2 & 3 (pas-

sive input signal) or terminal INPUT connection 2 & 8 (active input signal)
For definition of passive input signal and active input signal, please refer to sec-
tion 3.4.4.
No setting is required for this parameter. The default setting is 15 seconds.
38
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
The analog input signals should be 4-20 mA.
The display range of the input signals is from 0.0 to 999.9. Both input signals can
be scaled freely within this range by editing the minimum and maximum displays
( ). Usually each analog input signal is arranged for a specific
input following the agreement between you and Hamworthy Moss AS.
The minimum display is correspondent to a signal of 4 mA.
The maximum display is correspondent to a signal of 20 mA.
The route for calibration of Analog Input 1 is Tools menu\Service (Password level 1:
9490) \Analog in/out settings\Analog input 1
This procedure should usually only be relevant after reloading the factory settings.
The calibration of analog input signal is carried out in one of the following ways:
Option 1: Input of tested values

Select and key-in the value according to the value in
the test sheet attached to each specific monitor. Press to save. The screen
will automatically come back to the screen. Then,
Select , and key-in the value according to the value in the
value in the test sheet attached to each specific monitor. Press to
save.
Option 2: Manual calibration
Do the manual calibration of analog signal only if the analog signal does not func-
tion properly with the input of the tested values (Option 1).
The manual calibration of analog input signal requires you to go back and forth
between the screen and the .
For Zero calibration

Simulate a current of 4 mA to Analog Input 1. For passive input signal, connect
to terminal INPUT connection 1 & 3. For active input signal, connect to ter-
minal INPUT connection 1 & 8.
Select and adjust the value in until value of analog in-
put Ai01 in the equal to the value. Then save the new
value of .
39
Appendix
For Span calibration

Simulate a current of 20 mA to Analog Input 1. For passive input signal, con-
nect to terminal INPUT connection 1&3. For active input signal, connect to
terminal INPUT connection 1 & 8.
Select , and adjust the value in until value of analog
input Ai01 in the equal to the value. Save the new value
of .
For the calibration of Analog Input 2 (Ai02), select in the

menu and connect the simulator to Analog Input 2, terminal INPUT con-
nection 2 & 3 (passive input signal) or connection 2 & 8 (active input signal).
Then, follow the same procedure for setting of Analog Input 1.
No setting is required for this parameter. The default setting is and shall not
be changed.
Specification
Flow range: 0.2 – 10 l/min
Applicable fluid Dry air, N2, Ar, CO2
Output signals: 1 analog output 4 – 20 mA & 1 NPN output
Display LED type 3 digits, 23 x 11 mm
Alarm 1 alarm set point – displayed in Green (as per default) with 1
NPN output
Electrical connections
Digital Flow G36
Switch
INPUT Terminal
White: Terminal 1: Analog Input 1 (Ai01)
Brown: Terminal 3: Internal power supply +24VDC
Black: Terminal 6: Digital Input 3 (Di02)
Blue: Terminal 8: Internal power supply – Ground
D-Out Terminal:
Terminals 8.3-9.3-10.3 (NC-COM-NO): Relay 3 - Flow alarm*
* For connection of the flow alarm, please refer to section 3.4.3.
40
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Setting of alarm level
Default alarm level is set as follows:

Alarm level Hysteresis Alarm delay
3.0 l/m 0.5 l/m 1.00 second
If you wish to change the alarm level, please follow the following procedure:
1. Press button once in the measurement mode
2. [P_1] and set value are displayed by turn
3. Press and button to change the set value. button is for increase
and button is for decrease.
4. Press button to finish the setting.
If you wish to change both the alarm level and hysteresis, please follow the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Press button for about 2 sec. or longer to display function selection

mode
2. Press once to move to function
3. Press button, the screen will flick between and .
4. Press button again, and will be now displayed by turn
a. If you want to set a high alarm which means alarm is ON when the
flow exceeds the set value:
i. Press button, and the default set value will be now

displayed by turn.
ii. Use and button to change the set value.
41
Appendix
iii. Press button to finish the setting.
b. If you want to set a low alarm which means alarm is ON when the
flow is lower than the set value:
i. Press up or down button, the screen will show 1_n;
ii. Then press button, the screen will flick between

and the default set value.
iii. Use and button to change the set value. Press but-
ton to save the setting.
5. The screen will flick between and the default hysteresis value. Use
and button to choose the hysteresis.
6. Press button to times until the screen displays .
7. Then press button for 2 sec. or longer until the measurement mode
comes back on the display.
Alarm delay can be set in . The display of will be between

and the default delay value in second (e.g. = 1 second). Use
and button to set up the delay time, then button to save. After that, hold
button again for 2 seconds or longer until the measurement mode comes back
on the display.
List of function settings
Item Explanation Default setting

F_0 [Uni] Unit selection To select the indication unit l/min
[L]: l/min;
F_1 [oU1] Settings of OUT1
- Output mode Select output for instantaneous Hysteresis mode
flow ([HYS] hysteresis mode,
[Yin] window comparator), [Add]
accumulated flow or [PLS] ac-
cumulated pulse
- Reversed output Select [1_P] normal output or Normal output
[1_n] reversed output
42
H36 Oxygen Analyzer
- Flow setting To set alarm level (for [P_1] 3.0 l/min

normal output or [n_1] reversed
output)
- Hysteresis [H_1] chattering can be pre- 0.3
vented by setting hysteresis
- Indication color [CoL] Select the color to indicate Alarm ON: Green
alarm Alarm OFF: Red
F_2 [oU2] Setting of output 2: not available as per default
F_3 [Flu] Operating fluid [Air]: Dry air – N2; [Ar]: Ar; Dry air – N2
[Co2]: CO2
F_4 [rEF] Display unit se- [Anr] Standard condition in at- Standard condi-
lection mospheric pressure at 20oC, or tion
[nor] Reference condition in at-
mospheric condition at 0oC
F_5 [rES] Response time Setting of alarm delay, e.g. 1 s.
[1.00]:1 s; [0.10]: 0.1 s; [0.01]:
10 ms
F_6 [dSP] Display mode [inS] Instantaneous flow Instantaneous
[Add] Accumulated flow flow
F_7 [inP] External input: not available as per default

F_8 [drE] Display resolu- [IE2 ] 1 decimal; 1 decimal
tion [IE3] 2 decimals
F_9 [PrS] Auto pre-set [oFF] Manual; [on] Automatic Manual
F_10 [EEP] Hold accumu- [oFF]: Off OFF
lated value Every X min, e.g. [5.0]: every 5
min
F_11 [AFL] Select analogue [on]: On; [oFF]: Off ON
output filter
F_12 [Eco] Select power [on]: On; [oFF]: Off OFF
saving mode
F_13 [Pin] Set secret code [on]: On; [oFF]: Off t OFF
input
F_99 Reset to the initial set-
Indicate [ON] with pressing
ting
and button, then hold down
and button for 5
seconds or more simultaneously
Full operation manual for the digital flow switch can be downloaded from the fol-
lowing link: www.smcworld.com/2002/instruction/e/PFM7_A6-A.eng.pdf
43
Appendix
44
Manual
H360x IGOA System

Content
46
Inert Gas Sampling System
11. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 48

12. SYSTEM INSTALLATION 49
12.2 WHERE TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM 49
12.4 SINGLE BOARD 50
12.4.1 Mounting Panel 50
12.4.2 Sample Gas Connection 50
12.4.3 Calibration Gas Connection 51
12.4.4 Vent Line Connection 53
12.4.5 Analyzer and Electrical Connection 53
12.4.6 Digital Flow Switch (Optional) 53
12.5 DOUBLE BOARD 53
13. SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 57

13.1 INSTALLATION CHECKS OF THE SAMPLING BOARD 57
13.3 START OF SYSTEM 57
14. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 59

14.1 SAMPLE AND TEST GAS FLOW SYSTEM 59
14.2 FILTER AND BUBBLE GLASS 59
14.3 ANALYZER 60
15. SPARE PARTS 61
47
System Specifications
Sampling Board for Inert gas application

Sample pressure & flow 0.05 to 1 bar – 2 to 8 l/min
Sample temperature 0°C to 70°C
Sample manifold 3 ports – 1/8” BSP connection
Span gas reduction regulator Max. 8 bar – 1/8” BSP connection
with filter 25 µm
Zero gas reduction regulator Max. 8 bar – 1/8” BSP connection
Flow control valve 8 turn control valve
Sample selector valve 5-way and 4-position switching valve SS 316
Test gas selector valve 3-way and 2-position switching valve SS 316
Inert Gas Single Board Dimensions: 60 × 50 × 14 cm (H × W × D)
Weight: Ca. 12 kg without water & packaging
Inert Gas Double Board Dimensions: 61 × 79 × 14 cm (H × W × D)
Weight: Ca. 20 kg without water & packaging
Analyzer
See details in Section 2 – Manual Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Optional Equipment
Digital flow Switch 0.2–10 l/min, 1 analog output 4–20 mA & 1 NPN out-
put, display with LED type 3 digits, 1 alarm set point
with the NPN output.
Remote digital display 22…250 VAC/DC with 2 configurable alarm relays
Ambient Temperature: –20°C to 60°C
Panel cut-out: 44.5 × 91.5 mm
Other optional equipment Pre-filter for sample gas
Signal amplifier
Signal amplifier for logarithmic output
Visualization, recording, and data logging
Specifications are subject to changes without notice.
48
Read this chapter in its entirety before installing the system.
Upon receipt of the Hamworthy Moss AS’ Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System –
(IGOA System), please inspect and confirm that the received scope of supply is in
accordance with the packing list and not damaged. Any discrepancy should be re-
ported to the supplier immediately. If any of the received parts are damaged, the
shipping company should be informed, and new parts should be made available
before completing the installation.
Satisfactory operation of Hamworthy Moss AS’ IGOA System, faultless functions

and minimal maintenance are achieved by paying attention to the following notes:
The IGOA System including the Inert Gas Sampling Board should be installed
in a clean area away from dust, oil mist and moisture. The system elements
should all be installed at viewing level in an area with good access for operat-
ing and servicing the system.
It is recommended that the IGOA System is located very close to the sampling
point of the inert gas system in order to have current and accurate readings.
Large bore sample lines as well as longer sample lines will increase the re-
sponse time due to dead volume.
The location and installation of the system must be chosen, so that the ambient
temperature at any time is below 55 C.
49
System Installation
Hot sensor
The sensor is hot and can cause sever burning of personnel if not handled with
care.
Analyzer(s)
Before working with the analyzer(s), please read Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Manual in its entirety.
Installation and operation

It should be pointed out that installation and operation of the Inert Gas Oxygen
Analyzing System and associated equipment must be carried out by skilled,
trained and certified personnel, and that Hamworthy Moss AS does not take any
responsibility of the operation of the system and associated equipment whatsoev-
er.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon proper
handling, installation, operation, and maintenance.
Recycling
Do not dispose any part of the IGOA System with regular refuse. Disposal should
be in accordance with the requirements of the current statutory regulations.
The mounting panel has two (2) angle iron mounting brackets. The brackets are
made from ordinary mild steel and can be directly welded or bolted to a chosen
structure as required. The two mounting brackets are mounted horizontal and pa-
rallel with a distance of 550 mm. For dimensions and layout, see Figure 12-1 and
Figure 12-2.
The sample gas has to be taken from a suitable location representative for the gas
to be tested.
The connection for sample gas is arranged in the top left corner of the system
board at the sample manifold. Up to three (3) samples can be connected to the
manifold. The three connections are all arranged as 1/8" BSP female connections,
and marked from bottom: 1, 2, and 3. The system is supplied with the manifold
sample ports plugged.
50
Figure 12-1: Piping & Instrumentation Diagram of the IGOAS - Single Sampling Board
For test and calibration, a calibration gas with known oxygen content is used, e.g.
a test gas with 2% oxygen content in pure nitrogen. For linearization, clean and
dry compressed instrument air is normally used as span calibration gas. Both gas-
es are connected direct to the respective reduction stations. The lower reduction
station with filter and drain is for the span gas (instrument air). The upper reduc-
tion station without filter is for the zero calibration gas taken from a bottle. Con-
nections for both reduction stations are a 1/8" BSP female connection.
51
System Installation
Figure 12-2: IGOA System - Single Sampling Board
52
A vent line connection for the bubble glass is arranged right below the sample
ports. It is for the connection to an external vent line which allows venting the
sampled inert gas from the bubble glass to the outside air. The vent line must be
dimensioned to allow a gas flow of at least 10 l/min and arranged in such a way
that it avoids backpressure and secures a sufficient sample gas flow (i.e. bubbles
in the water). The vent line must be uninterrupted and easily bring away the inert
gas.
The H36 Oxygen Analyzer is placed in the bottom right corner of the mounting
panel. For lay out of an Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System with Single Sam-
pling Board, see Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-2.
The instructions for electrical connections are described in Part 1: H36 Oxygen
Analyzer Manual – Section 3.
Hamworthy Moss AS’ Inert Gas Oxygen Analyzing System may be configured
with a digital flow switch for a sample flow alarm to assure there is always a sam-
ple flow via sensor.
The installing and operating instructions of the digital flow switch are described in
Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer – Section 10.3.
For instrumentation diagram, please see Figure 12-1.
The double board is designed for an analyzing system with the configuration of
two sensors and two oxygen analyzers for inert gas.
The double sampling board consists of a single sampling board described in the
previous section and an extension board mounted on the right hand side of the
single board. This extension board consists of a mounting panel, a H36 Oxygen
Analyzer and a selector box for switching the output signals between the two ana-
lyzers.
53
System Installation
Figure 12-3: Double Sampling Board
54
Figure 12-4: Piping & Instrumentation Diagram for Double Sampling Board
Installation of the Double Board
The installation of the double board is carried out equivalent to the installation of
the single board as described in the previous section. See Figure 12-3 and Figure
12-4 for the layout and P/I diagram of a Double Sampling Board.
The analyzers are prewired with the selector box. The interfaces of each H36 Oxy-
gen Analyzer are the same as described in Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer Manual.
The power supply and signal output cables are connected to the selector box. The
electrical connections are dependent on the actual system configuration. Only
those functions to be used shall be connected. For details of all standard connec-
tions to the Selector Box, please see Figure 12-5.
55
System Installation
Power Supply
Protective earth Spade
Mains IN
Neutral Live J3 - Terminal 1
Power lead J3 - Terminal 2
Power Unit 1 - prewired
Power Unit 2 - prewired
Relay Output – J8
R4–not used by default J8 - Terminal 8

R4–not used by default J8 - Terminal 7
R3–System failure alarm J8 - Terminal 6
R3–System failure alarm J8 - Terminal 5
R2–Alarm HI-HI O2 % J8 - Terminal 4
R2–Alarm HI-HI O2 % J8 - Terminal 3
R1–Alarm LOW HI O2 % J8 - Terminal 2
R1–Alarm LOW HI O2 % J8 - Terminal 1
Relay Input from Unit 2 – J7 - prewired

R4–not used by default J7 - Terminal 8&7
R3–System failure alarm J7 - Terminal 6&5
R2–Alarm HI-HI O2 % J7 - Terminal 4&3
R1–Alarm LOW HI O2 % J7 - Terminal 2&1
Relay Input from Unit 1 – J6

R4–not used by default J6 - Terminal 8&7
R3–System failure alarm J6 - Terminal 6&5
R2–Alarm HI-HI O2 % J6 - Terminal 4&3
R1–Alarm LOW HI O2 % J6 - Terminal 2&1
Analog Outputs– J12

Analog output 2 (-) J12 - Terminal 4
Analog output 2 (+) J12 - Terminal 3
Analog output 1 (-) J12 - Terminal 2
Analog output 1 (+) J12 - Terminal 1
Analog Inputs from Unit 2 – J11 Analog Inputs from Unit 1 – J10
Analog output 2 (-) J11 - Terminal 4 Analog output 2 (-) J10 - Terminal 4
Analog output 2 (+) J11 - Terminal 3 Analog output 2 (+) J10 - Terminal 3
Analog output 1 (-) J11 - Terminal 2 Analog output 1 (-) J10 - Terminal 2
Analog output 1 (+) J11 - Terminal 1 Analog output 1 (+) J10 - Terminal 1
Figure 12-5: Electrical connections of the Selector Box
56
Before starting the system for the first time after completing the installation,
please check the installation of the system.
Check that the span and zero calibration gases are connected, and that all con-
nections are secured and not leaking. A leaking connection will result in loss
of calibration gas and may result in poor calibration.
Check that the sample gases are connected, and that the connections are se-
cured and not leaking. Sample gas connections should be as close to the
process as possible, preferably made from 6 mm stainless piping in order to
reduce the dead volume in the sampling system. If the sample gas is heavily
contaminated with particles, a pre-filter should be installed. The sample gas
has to be taken from a suitable location representative for the gas to be tested.
Check connection and setting of the analyzer following the instructions in Part
1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer Manual – Sections 3-5. When working with a Double
Sampling Board, this step needs to be carried out for each analyzer separately.
Start the analyzer following the instructions in Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer
Manual - Section 5.
Fill up the bubble glass with clean (preferably distilled) water to the water line
marked on the glass.
57
System Commissioning
Introduce sample gas to a sample port and turn the selector valve to the se-
lected sample port, 1-3.
Open the flow control valve slowly until bubbles are noted. Open the flow
control valve so much that there is a steady stream of bubbles from both the
by-pass and sample return pipes inside the bubble glass. The longest pipe is
for by-passing of sample gas against the water static pressure to secure a suffi-
cient flow rate and constant sample pressure at the sensor. The short pipe is the
return of sample gas from the sensor(s). Increased gas flow indicating by more
bubbles from both pipes will reduce the sampling delay time. However, too
high velocity – indicated by an enormous amount of bubbles – will change the
sensor temperature and consequently the readings.
Turn the selector valve to Test Gas and the calibration selector valve to Zero
Gas, and adjust the zero gas reduction station until the flow is about the same
as noted for the sample gas by observing the bubble flow.
Turn the calibration selector valve to Span Gas, and adjust the span gas reduc-
tion station until the flow is about the same as noted for the sample gas by ob-
serving the bubble flow.
Now, the system is ready for calibration following the instructions in Part 1:
H36 Oxygen Analyzer Manual - Section 6.
58
Routine inspection and maintenance of the sampling system is required to make

sure no gas is leaking from the test or calibration gas supply. Failure to periodical-
ly inspect and maintain the above requirements may lead to imprecise analyzer
readings and thus a malfunction of the inert gas system.
The system with the sample and test gas selector valves and flow control valves is
tested from the factory.
For the selector valve packing, adjustment may be required for leak-tight perfor-
mance. Adjust the packing by turning the packing bolt clockwise in 1/16-turn in-
crements until leak-tight performance is achieved. Always verify proper operation
upon installation.
Protect the reduction units from the ultraviolet rays and adhesion of organic sol-
vents. Depressurize the reduction stations before cleaning and service.
Clean with neutral detergent.
The system with filter, bubble glass and sensor is tested from the factory.
Filter
The filter element located on top of the bubble glass will require periodical re-
placement. The changing period will be determined based on actual sample condi-
tion and how dirty the filter gets. When changing the filter, the sample flow con-
trol valve must be closed so that the system must be completely isolated from the
59
Routine Maintenance
sample or calibration gas. The filter element is removed by unscrewing the filter
top using 5 mm allen-key.
Check the condition of the filter O-ring seals and replace if required. For spare
parts, see the list of spare parts in Section 15.
Bubble glass
Check daily the level in the bubble glass and re-fill with clean (preferably distill-
ed) water as required. It is recommended to drain the bubble glass monthly and re-
fill with clean (preferably distilled) water. The bubble glass may need internal
cleaning. Clean with neutral detergent. O-rings for the bubble glass may require
replacement for leak free operation.
Prevent the glass from ultraviolet rays and adhesion of organic solvents. For spare
parts, see the list of spare parts in Section 15.
Please also check that the vent line functions uninterrupted and secures a suffi-
cient gas flow. There must not be a build-up of pressure in the bubble glass.
Refer to Part 1: H36 Oxygen Analyzer Manual - Section 7 for the routine mainten-
ance of the analyzer.
60
the specific appearance of the

Part Part Description spare parts is subject change with-
No. out notice; the function however will
not change
00328 O-ring for IG sensor
00358 Selector valve sample/test gases
00373 O-ring for filter house
00379 Bubble glass tube
00380 Sample filter glass
Sensor complete with O-ring/disc

00390
(includes 00328)
00395 Filter Elements (pkg of 5)
Span gas filter regulator – 1/8”

00657
0-2 bar
61
Spare Parts
Zero gas regulator – 1/8”

00659
0.02–2 bar
00477 Sensor cable complete 0.8 m
00605 Gasket for drain plug
00739 Selector valve test gases
Gasket set bubble glass

00754
(2 teflon gaskets, 2 big O-rings, 1 small O-ring)
01017 Selector Box HM – 90-230 VAC
01047 Cable glands – M20
01251 Fuse 2 AT (pkg of 10)
SD card with H36 software & standard settings

01471
files
01475 Bubble glass complete
62
01477 Needle consol valve for bubble glass
01482 H36 Oxygen Analyzer 100-230 VAC
01483 H36 Oxygen Analyzer 24 VDC
The Manuals
01526
for Hamworthy Moss’ IGOA System
Optional
01453 Digital flow transmitter 0.2-10 l/min (optional)
33594 Pre-Filter incl. filter cartridge
00980 Filter cartridge for pre-filter
Other optional equipment – e.g. flow alarm, visualization, recording and data
logging, monitoring of IG temperature, pressure, and load – can be supplied.
63
Spare Parts
64
65
HAMWORTHY MOSS AS
VAERFTSGT 13 • NO-1510 Moss • Norway
Tel.: +47 6927 9900 • Fax: +47 6925 4578
Wärtsilä Moss AS
P.O. Box 1053,
NO-1510 Moss, NORWAY
Enterprise: NO 985 958 246 VAT
Tel +47 69 27 99 00
Fax +47 69 25 45 78
E-mail moss@wartsila.com
Web www.wartsila.com
CERTIFICATES AND TEST SHEETS

MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM FOR:
Daewoo Shipbuilding & Marine Engineering Co., Ltd

HULL NO.: 2045
CONTRACT NO.: 4001446679
Wärtsilä MOSS AS PROJ. NO.: P- 6118
Wärtsilä MOSS AS ORDER NO.: 131381
TABLE OF CONTENT
NO. DESCRIPTION
1 DNV Certificate for Panels ( 1 page )
2 DNV Certificate for Pumps ( 3 pages )
3 DNV Certificate for AC Generators or Motors ( 7 pages )
4 Dew point transmitter calibration ( 1 page )

2405 - Complete Instruction Manualbook 00

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2405 - Complete Instruction Manualbook 00

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Wärtsilä Moss AS

Wärtsilä Moss AS Telephone E-mail: moss@wartsila.com

MOSS INERT GAS SYSTEM

TYPE: INERT GAS, GAS CARRIER

Client / Client ref: Project no.: Serial no.:

2.00 TECHNICAL DATA

4.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

5.00 INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPERATION AND STOP

6.00 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

7.00 SOME POSSIBLE CAUSES TO FAULTS DURING START AND

8.00 DRYER INSTRUCTION AND CHILLED WATER UNIT

9.00 PARTS / SPARE PARTS LIST - DRAWINGS

10.00 LIST OF DRAWINGS - ELECTRICAL

11.00 INSTRUCTION AND PAMPHLETS

Chapter 1.00 GENERAL

1.2 Explosive Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

1.3 Inert Gas System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

1.4 Safe Oxygen Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

1.5 Health Hazards with Inert Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

1.5.1 Oxygen deficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

Chapter 2.00 TECHNICAL DATA

2.1 Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

2.2 Water Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.3 El. power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.4 Instrument air at 6 - 10bar g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.5 Steam to drier heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3

Chapter 3.00 DESCRIPTION

3.1 The Oil Burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

3.2 The Ignition Burner (Fig. 3-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3.3 The cooling Tower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3.4 Fuel Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3.5 The Combustion Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3.6 The Refrigeration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3.7 The Dryer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3.8 The Inert Gas System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

3.9 The Cooling Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

3.10 The Drain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5

Chapter 4.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

4.1 Indicating Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

4.1.1 Temperature Indicators (TI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

4.2.1 Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

4.4.1 Oxygen analysing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

Chapter 5.00 INSTRUCTION FOR PLANT START, OPERATION AND STOP

5.1.1 Before Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

5.3.1 Before Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

Chapter 6.00 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 I.M.O. Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

6.3 Burner Scrubber Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

6.4 Refrigeration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

6.5 Dryer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.6 Adjustment and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.6.1 Oil Burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.9 Lubrication Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11

Chapter 7.00 SOME POSSIBLE CAUSES TO FAULTS DURING START AND

7.1 If control current is not on:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

7.2 If ignition does not take place:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

7.3 If fuel oil pressure is too low: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

7.4 If seawater pressure is too low:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

7.5 If seawater level in cooling tower is too high: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

7.6 If inert gas temperature is higher than approx. 5°C

7.7 If the O2 content increases, and the fuel oil consumption

7.8 If the instrument air pressure is too low: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Inert gas is used to displace air in order to minimize explosion hazards.